Elmark 2008 EN

ELMARK has been a registered trademark for Europe since the year of 2000 and is part of
the international company ELMARK HOLDING SC. Our company is licensed for the manufacture of
the full range of professional low voltage electrical equipment.
The headquarters of ELMARK HOLDING SC are in Varna, Bulgaria. Here is our logistics
center which coordinates our activities in Europe and throughout the world.
The company ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC, being part of our holding, manages our
manufacture, while ELMARK GROUP-BULGARIA LTD, ELMARK GRUP SRL – Romania and
ELMARK GRUP DOO - Serbia manage our trade activities in the respective countries.
Our European factory is located in Bulgaria on an area of 10 000 sq. m. In its storage
premises are stored large quantities of all products included in the technical catalogue. It is from
here that the goods for Europe and the world are distributed. The facility includes a modern
warehouse situated on an area of 5 000 sq.m. which allows us to store considerable quantities that
respond to the needs of our clients. The management and the quality management system used for
the manufactured products are certified with the issued ISO 9001:2000 certificates, the complete
test certificates for CE marking complying with Directive 73/23 EEC and ROHS (Restriction of
hazardous Substances) certificates which guarantee the absence of any substances hazardous to
the people and the environment.
The full three-year warranty period is an additional proof of the quality of the ELMARK
products. It is further accompanied by a special international insurance, which guarantees the
coverage of damages which may occur as a result from an action or inaction of our products.
ELMARK HOLDING SC is represented by distributing companies in Greece, Cyprus,
Croatia, Hungary, Macedonia, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Montenegro, Sri Lanka, The Republic of
South Africa, Jordan and Iran. The contract negotiations with distributors in France, Israel and
Albania are almost finalized. There is a serious interest on the part of Kuwait and the United Arab
Emirates.
Our successful trade policy results from the high quality of the ELMARK product range and
from the successful balance of supply and demand of electrical equipment on competitive prices. As
a result, ELMARK HOLDING SC has been a trustworthy and desired partner on the European and
world market for seven years.
CONTENTS
2
www.elmarkgroup.eu
CERTIFICATES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
А1 Miniature circuit breakers C45, C60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
А1 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
А1 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
А1 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
А1 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + N). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
А1 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60Dc series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
А1 Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
А2 Switch disconnectors ISS 63…100A series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
А2 Isolating switches ISS2 125…800A series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
А2 Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M from 125 to 800А . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
А3 High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
А3 High capacity circuit breakers DS1 to 1600A – electronic type (MCCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
А3 Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
А4 High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 63…1250A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
А5 High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
А6 Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES
B1 Residual current devices JVL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
B2 Combined circuit breakers with residual current device JVL5 (RCD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
B3 Combined circuit breakers with residual current device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
B4 Surge arresters SPD type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CONTACTORS
C1 Low voltage contactors LT 1-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
C2 Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
C3 Low voltage contactors LT 1- F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
C4 Low voltage contactors with direct current coil LP 1-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
C5 AC contactor for switching on of capacitors CJ19-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
C6 Reverse contactors LT 4-Dxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
C7 Auxiliary contact blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
C8 Module contactors K series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION

D1 Complex compensating devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
D2 Capacitor batteries and cosφ regulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
D3 Filters for harmonics and metal boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS

Е1 Thermal relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
E2 Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Е3 Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Е4 Starters for direct start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
E5 “Star/delta” starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Е6 Reverse starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Е7 ELM 1000 frequency inverters for conveyor systems control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Е7 Frequency inverters EL – ZVF9 type for water pumps and fans control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Е7 ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Е8 Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Е9 ELM 2500 soft starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Е10 Programmable timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Е11 Digital counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Е12 Industrial Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
CONTENTS
3
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Е13 Devices for temperature measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Е14 Current measurement transformesr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Е15 Voltage transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Е16 Displaying measurement devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Е17 Manual meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Е18 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL

F1 Limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
F2 Proximity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
F3 Capacitive sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
F4 Photoelectrical sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
F5 Rotary switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
F6 Buttons and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
F7 Buttons and LED indicators for DIN-rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
F8 Devices for telpher control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

G1 Bases for high power safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
G2 Fuse links for high power safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
G3 Isolating switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
G4 Switch disconnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS

H1 Industrial plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
H2 Static industrial plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
H3 Static industrial contacts for exposed wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
H4 Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
H5 Industrial built in contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
H6 Distribution boxes with industrial contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
PLASTIC BOXES AND METAL CABINETS FOR DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

I1 Plastic distribution boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
I2 Metal distribution boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
I3 Module plastic distribution boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
I4 Cable support systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
I5 Moisture-proof junction boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
INSTRUMENTS
J1 Hydraulic crimping instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
J2 Hydraulic piercing instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
J3 Mechanical cutting instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
J4 Hand instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
CONSUMATIVES AND CABLE TERMINALS

K1 Non-insulated butt terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
K2 Non-insulated terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
K3 Insulated terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
K4 Consumatives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
K5 Terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
K6 Thermal shrinkable tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
K7 Multiplugs and cable reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
THERMAL SHRINKABLE TUBES

L1 "RHYME”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
L2 "SPLENDOR" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
L3 "BASIC". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
L4 "LIFE STYLE" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Certificates of the trade companies – Bulgaria, Romania, Serbia
4
www.elmarkgroup.eu
ISO certificates of ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC
5
www.elmarkgroup.eu
ROHS certificates
6
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Test reports with EC directives N 73/23 EEC “Low Voltage Directives”
7
Issued by Center for testing and European certification www.elmarkgroup.eu
Notified by the European certificate organization NANDO – Brussels

(New Approach Notified and Designated Organization) № 1871, http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/newapproach/nando
Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Bosnia and Herzegovina
8
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Serbia
9
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Croatia
10
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Certificate for international insurance in Alliance IRIND
11
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Circuit breakers
12
Miniature circuit breakers C45, C60
www.elmarkgroup.eu
TERMINAL
NON-FLAMMABLE COVER
JUMP KNUCKLE
HANDLE
A1
LOCK KNACKLE
MOVABLE CONTACT
ARC CHAMBER
STATIC CONTACT
MAXIMUM CURRENT RELEASE
AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory)
UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (accessory)
SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)
10 11 12 CHARACTERISTICS
Circuit breakers are automatically-operated electrical switches, designed to protect electrical

circuits from damage caused by overload or short circuit. They can also be used as devices for
commutation and control of electrical circuits. They differ in the following characteristics:
* Operating voltage: 230, 400V
* Number of poles: 1, 2, 3, 4
* Breaking curve:
- curve B – breaks between 3 and 5 In, used for low voltage short circuit currents (long circuits
and generators)
- curve C – breaks between 5 and 10 In, used for protection of main power supply cables and
conventional consumers
- curve D – breaks between 10 and 20 In, used for protection of industrial consumers with high
initial current flow (electric motors)
* Breaking capacity: 4.5, 6kA
Circuit breakers
13
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60N
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type designation Functions:

- protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit
С6xN constructive series - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
number of poles (1;2;3;4) - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit
C x rated current - for mounting in housing and industrial buildings
breaking curve С - for mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m
- allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 6000 A
Documents corresponding Technical data:
to the product: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
Standard EN60898-1 * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 6000A
* Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu A1
* Isolating voltage:≥2000V
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000
* Class of current limiting:3
* IP code: IP>20
* Breaking curve:
B – the maximum current release breaks between 3 and 5 In; used to protect long circuits and generators
C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and
conventional consumers
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 – A
* Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance
* Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s
* Maximum current release containing:
- copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type
- resistance: from 0.6 to 180mΩ
- welding effort: <150 000 N/mm2
- bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 depending on the current
- thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A)
- magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9)
- thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm
- drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm2
- contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5)
- dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A)
- static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2
- composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
* Power supply (conducting)

- power supply busbar 1P63, 3P63
- rigid conductors up to 25 mm2
- flexible conductors up to 16 mm2
* Tightening moment:1.33Nm
Mounting:
* vertical
* DIN-rail
* for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious
interference
* ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C
Recommended
Type Rated current Breaking capacity sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package/Box
In A (kA) mounting Curve C Curve B (pcs)
conductors (mm2)
61N / 1A 1 6 1.0 41100 41501 12 / 240
61N / 2A 2 6 1.0 41102 41502 12 / 240
61N / 4A 4 6 1.0 41104 41504 12 / 240
61N / 6A 6 6 1.0 41106 41506 12 / 240
61N / 10A 10 6 1.5 41110 41510 12 / 240
61N / 16A 16 6 2.5 41116 41516 12 / 240
61N / 20A 20 6 2.5 41120 41520 12 / 240
61N / 25A 25 6 4.0 41125 41525 12 / 240
61N / 32A 32 6 6.0 41132 41532 12 / 240
61N / 40A 40 6 10.0 41140 41540 12 / 240
61N / 50A 50 6 10.0 41150 41550 12 / 240
61N / 63A 63 6 16.0 41163 41563 12 / 240
Circuit breakers
14
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Recommended
Type Rated current Breaking capacity sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
conductors (mm2)
62N / 2А 2 6 1.0 41202 41602 6 / 120

62N / 4A 4 6 1.0 41204 41604 6 / 120
62N / 6A 6 6 1.0 41206 41606 6 / 120
62N / 10A 10 6 1.5 41210 41610 6 / 120
62N / 16A 16 6 2.5 41216 41616 6 / 120
62N / 20A 20 6 2.5 41220 41620 6 / 120
A1 62N / 25A 25 6 4.0 41225 41625 6 / 120
62N / 32A 32 6 6.0 41232 41632 6 / 120
62N / 40A 40 6 10.0 41240 41640 6 / 120
62N / 50A 50 6 10.0 41250 41650 6 / 120
62N / 63A 63 6 16.0 41263 41663 6 / 120
Recommended
conductors (mm2)
63N/2A 2 6 1.0 41302 41702 4 / 80

63N/4A 4 6 1.0 41304 41704 4 / 80
63N / 6A 6 6 1.0 41306 41706 4 / 80
63N / 10A 10 6 1.5 41310 41710 4 / 80
63N / 16A 16 6 2.5 41316 41716 4 / 80
63N / 20A 20 6 2.5 41320 41720 4 / 80
63N / 25A 25 6 4.0 41325 41725 4 / 80
63N / 32A 32 6 6.0 41332 41732 4 / 80
63N / 40A 40 6 10.0 41340 41740 4 / 80
63N / 50A 50 6 10.0 41350 41750 4 / 80
63N / 63A 63 6 16.0 41363 41763 4 / 80
Recommended
conductors (mm2)
64N / 2A 2 6 1.0 41402 41802 3 / 60
64N / 4A 4 6 1.0 41404 41804 3 / 60
64N / 6A 6 6 1.0 41406 41806 3 / 60
64N / 10A 10 6 1.5 41410 41810 3 / 60
64N / 16A 16 6 2.5 41416 41816 3 / 60
64N / 20A 20 6 2.5 41420 41820 3 / 60
64N / 25A 25 6 4.0 41425 41825 3 / 60
64N / 32A 32 6 6.0 41432 41832 3 / 60
64N / 40A 40 6 10.0 41440 41840 3 / 60
64N / 50A 50 6 10.0 41450 41850 3 / 60
64N / 63A 63 6 16.0 41463 41863 3 / 60
C60 curve B C60 curve C
1. Thermal release 1. Thermal release
2. Electromagnetic release
2. Electromagnetic release
Circuit breakers
15
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type designation: Functions:

- protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit
С100М constructive series; - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
number of poles (1;2;3;4) - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit
D x rated current Technical data:
breaking curve С; D * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
* Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A
* Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu
* Isolating volatage:≥2000V
Documents corresponding to
the product: * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000 A1
Standard EN60898-1 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000
EN 60947-2 * Class of current limiting:3
* IP code: IP>20
* Breaking curve: C,D
- resistance: from 148 to 230mΩ
- welding effort: <400 N/mm2
- bimetal plate – composition: TB180/0.5
- thickness: 0.8mm
- drawing effort: 20N/mm2
- dimension 6x6x1
* Power supply (conducting)
- power supply busbar 1P100, 3P100
* Tightening moment:1.33Nm
Mounting:
* vertical
* DIN-rail
* possibility for labeling
* for mounting in industrial environment
Poles Rated current Breaking capacity Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box
(A) (kA) Curve C Curve D (pcs)
1P 80 10 41180 41180D 9 / 180

100 10 41190 41190D 9 / 180
Circuit breakers
16
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)C100M
www.elmarkgroup.eu
2P 80 10 41280 41281 6 / 120

100 10 41290 41291 6 / 120
A1
3P 80 10 41380 41381 4 / 60
100 10 41390 41391 4 / 60
4P 80 10 41480 41481 3 / 60
100 10 41490 41491 3 / 60
(C Type) (D Type)
t(s) t(s)
1000 1000
5000 5000
2000 2000
1000 Thermal release 1000
500
500
200 200 Thermal release
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5
5
2
Electromagnetic 2
1 release 1
Electromagnetic
0.5
release
0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 i/in 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 i/in

Circuit breakers
17
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type designation: Functions:

- protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit
С4xN constructive series - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
number of poles (1;3) - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit
C x rated current - for mounting in housing and industrial buildings
breaking curve С - for mounting at a distance from the transformer post up to 150 m
- it allows protection of consumers generating low voltage short circuit currents to 4500 A
Documents corresponding Technical data:
to the product: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
Standard EN60898-1 * Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 4500A
EN 60947-2 * Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu A1
* Insulating voltage: ≥2000V
* Electrical wear resistance (number of commutation cycles): ≥4000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of commutation cycles): ≥20000
* Class of current limiting: 3
* IP code: IP≥20
* Breaking curve: C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply
cables and conventional consumers
- bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 according to the current
* Power supply (conducting):
- power supply busbar 1P63,3P63
* Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
Mounting
* vertical
* DIN-rail
* for mounting in housing or industrial environment without
serious interference
* Ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2°C
Recommended
Type Rated current Breaking capacity sections of the Catalogue number Package / Box
(kA) mounting Curve C (pcs)
In (A) conductors (mm2)
C41N / 6A 6 4.5 1.0 41451 12 / 240

C41N / 10A 10 4.5 1.5 41452 12 / 240
C41N / 16A 16 4.5 2.5 41453 12 / 240
C41N / 20A 20 4.5 2.5 41454 12 / 240
C41N / 25A 25 4.5 4.0 41455 12 / 240
C41N / 32A 32 4.5 6.0 41456 12 / 240
C41N / 40A 40 4.5 10.0 41457 12 / 240
C41N / 50A 50 4.5 10.0 41458 12 / 240
C41N / 63A 63 4.5 16.0 41459 12 / 240
Circuit breakers
18
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Recommended
In (A) conductors (mm2)
C43N / 6A 6 4.5 1.0 41541 4 / 80

C43N / 10A 10 4.5 1.5 41542 4 / 80
C43N / 16A 16 4.5 2.5 41543 4 / 80
C43N / 20A 20 4.5 2.5 41544 4 / 80
C43N / 25A 25 4.5 4.0 41545 4 / 80
A1 C43N / 32A 32 4.5 6.0 41546 4 / 80
C43N / 40A 40 4.5 10.0 41547 4 / 80
C43N / 50A 50 4.5 10.0 41548 4 / 80
C43N / 63A 63 4.5 16.0 41549 4 / 80
C45 Curve B C45 Curve C

Circuit breakers
19
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + N) www.elmarkgroup.eu
Functions:
- protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit
- it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits
- it breaks simultaneously the lead and the neutral conductor as the heat protection is only at the lead conductor
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
* Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 4500 A
* Rated breaking capacity Ics = 50% Icu
* IP code: IP>20
* Breaking curve: C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply A1
cables and conventional consumers
Connecting:
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal
- power supply busbar DP1N
- flexible or rigid conductor
* Mounting: on DIN-rail
Recommended
conductors (mm2)
DP1N / 6 6 4.5 1.0 41006 12 / 240

DP1N / 10 10 4.5 1.5 41010 12 / 240
DP1N / 16 16 4.5 2.5 41016 12 / 240
DP1N / 20 20 4.5 2.5 41020 12 / 240
DP1N / 25 25 4.5 4.0 41025 12 / 240
DP1N / 32 32 4.5 6.0 41032 12 / 240
Circuit breakers
20
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60Dc series
Type designation Functions:

- for lowering constant current voltaic arc and use of the breaker at constant current consumer protection
С6xDC constructive series - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit at alternating current and constant
number of poles (1;2;3;4) current power supply circuits
Cx rated current - for commutation and control of electrical circuits
breaking curve С - in combination with auxiliary alternating current devices for remote control, commutation or indication of the
protected circuit
Documents corresponding to - for mounting in industrial buildings
the product: - for protection of consumers generating short circuit currents to 6000 A at alternating current power supply
Standard EN60898-1 Technical data:
A1 EN 60898-2 * Rated voltage: 240V; AC/DC
* Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A
* Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥4000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥20000
* IP code: IP>20
* Breaking curve: C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect power supply cables
and conventional consumers
- bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 according to the current
- metal magnetic plate for lowering the constant current arc
* Conducting:
- power supply busbar 1P63
Mounting
* vertical
* DIN-rail
* for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious current interference
* Ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C
Circuit breakers
21
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Recommended
Type Breaking capacity Rated current sections of the Catalogue number Package/Box
(kA) In (A) mounting Curve C (pcs)
conductors (mm2)
61DC / 1A 6 1 1.0 41164 12 / 240

C61DC 61DC / 2A 6 2 1.0 41165 12 / 240
61DC / 4A 6 4 1.0 41166 12 / 240
61DC / 6A 6 6 1.0 41167 12 / 240
61DC / 10A 6 10 1.5 41168 12 / 240
61DC / 16A 6 16 2.5 41169 12 / 240
61DC / 20A 6 20 2.5 41170 12 / 240
A1
61DC / 25A 6 25 4.0 41171 12 / 240
61DC / 32A 6 32 6.0 41172 12 / 240
61DC / 40A 6 40 10.0 41173 12 / 240
61DC / 50A 6 50 10.0 41174 12 / 240
61DC / 63A 6 63 16.0 41175 12 / 240
72
65
36
49
18
5
78
45
Recommended
Type Breaking capacity Rated current sections of the Catalogue number Package/Box
(kA) In (A) mounting Curve C (pcs)
conductors (mm2)
62DC / 2A 6 2 1.0 41176 6 / 120

C62DC 62DC / 4A 6 4 1.0 41177 6 / 120
62DC / 6A 6 6 1.0 41178 6 / 120
62DC / 10A 6 10 1.5 41179 6 / 120
62DC / 16A 6 16 2.5 41181 6 / 120
62DC / 20A 6 20 2.5 41182 6 / 120
62DC / 25A 6 25 4.0 41183 6 / 120
Circuit breakers
22
Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Combined voltage circuit-breaker МN2

Functions:
- when the voltage is reduced below 170V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off
- when the voltage is increased above 270V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off
- allows manual turning on of the switch after powering is restored
- indication of the position of the device
Technical characteristics:
* Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
* Insulation voltage: ≥2000V
* Protection ratio: IP>20
A1 Connection method:
* Double connector: flat (tunnel) screw connector
Type designation: * Feeding (conducting):
МN - constructive series - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2
number of poles - 1 * Tightening moment of the screw: 1.33Nm
Mounting:
Documents corresponding
* vertical, by means of two pins attached to the rivets of the circuit-breaker, while the operating mechanism is
to the product:
connected to the switching off mechanism of the circuit breaker after the sealing lid is demounted
Standard EN60898-1
* DIN rail
* for mounting in industrial places
· Environmental temperature : -5 до +40°С±2°С
Type Rated Catalogue Package/Box
voltage number (pcs)
ELMARK MN2 230V 41909 8 / 160

Shunt release MX (independent release)
Functions:
- remote circuit breaker switching off at voltage feed
- allows manual switching on of the breaker at voltage recovery
- indication of the device's location
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
* Isolating voltage: ≥2000V
* IP code: IP>20
Connecting:
- flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2
Type designation: * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
МX - constructive series * The power supply of the release is accomplished at the outlet of the breaker
number of poles - 1 Mounting:
Documents corresponding * vertical, clamps with two pins to the breaker's rivets and the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching
mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover
to the product: * DIN- rail
Standard EN60898-1 * mounting in industrial environment:
Type Rated Catalogue Package / Box
voltage number (pcs)
ELMARK MX 230V 41902 8 / 160
Isolated mounting terminal for circuit breakers

Functions:
- provides a firm joining of rigid or flexible conductors up to 35mm2 to power supply busbar
- provides a firm joining of the power supply conductor to the breaker
- provides enough contact surface of the conductor
Technical data:
* Brass alloy with galvanic cover
* Fabric isolated with plastic cover
* Appropriate for joining to copper or aluminum cables
* Rated voltage: 230V
* Rated current: up to 63A
* IP code: IP>20
* Section of power supply conductor: up to 35mm2
Connecting:
* to the joining terminal of the breaker
Type Section of the conductor Rated current Catalogue Package / Box

(mm2) In (A) number (pcs)
TB 25 2.5 до 35 63 31025 20 / 500

Circuit breakers
23
Auxiliary contact OF
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Auxiliary contact OF
Functions:
-at circuit breaker switching off it sends a signal to the control or signalization system
-indication of the location of the auxiliary contact and the breaker
Technical data:
* Ingress protecting rating: IP>20
Connecting:
* Power supply (conducting): A1
Type designation: - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2
OF – constructive series * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm
number of poles – 1 Mounting:
* vertical, clamps with two pins to breaker's rivets, and the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching
Documents corresponding mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover
to the product: * DIN- rail
Standard EN60898-1 * mounting in industrial environment
* ambient temperature: -5 tо +40°С±2°С
Type Rated Circuit breaker Catalogue Box / Carton

voltage type number (pcs)
ELMARK OF 230V C40, C60 41901 12 / 240

ELMARK SD100 230V C100 41909 12 / 240
Power supply busbar
Functions:
-enables the supply of a group of conductors
-provides simultaneous supply
-conducting section – electrotechnical copper
-insulation of the conducting section
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V
* Isolating voltage: 500V
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°С
* Rated current (phase): 63/100A
Connecting:
* to the joining terminal of the breaker
Type Length Poles In with one point In with two points Catalogue Package / Box
(copper busbar) (m) (number) of power supply of power supply number (pcs)
1P 63 1 55 63А 90А 14163 10 / 100

1P 100 1 55 100A 120A 14190 10 / 100
2P 63 1 28 63A 90A 14263 8 / 50
3P 63 1 18 63А 90А 14363 6 / 30
3P 100 1 18 100A 120A 14390 5 / 20
DP 1N 1 56 63A 90A 14463 8 / 48
Mounting (DIN) rail

Functions:
-serves for mounting breakers, residual current devices, contactors and other elements
-provides a firm clamp of the elements
Technical data:
* brass alloy with galvanic cover
* factory drilled mounting openings
* length up to 1m
Connecting:
- with bolts or other fixing elements to the mounting surface
Length Package / Box

(m)
1m
(pcs)
Catalogue 14001 20 / 100

number
Circuit breakers
24
Switch disconnectors ISS 63…100A series
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN 60947-3 и Functions:

IEC947-3 - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
ROHS sertificate: - breaking of electrical circuits
№ А06111803L0811 - can be used as a main breaker
- short circuit current wear resistance in the protected circuit
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz
* Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid or flexible conductors
A2 * Isolating voltage: ≥500V
* IP code: IP>20
* Mounting: DIN-rail
* Plastic material of UV rays
* Ambient temperature: -20°C + 55°C
Recommended
Poles Rated current sections of the Catalogue number Package / Box
(A) mounting (pcs)
conductors (mm2)
1P 63 16 41911 12 / 240
80 25 41912 12 / 240
100 35 41913 12 / 240
Recommended
(A) mounting (pcs)
conductors (mm2)
2P 63 16 41921 6 / 120
80 25 41922 6 / 120
100 35 41923 6 / 120
Recommended
(A) mounting (pcs)
conductors (mm2)
3P 63 16 41931 4 / 80
80 25 41932 4 / 80
100 35 41933 4 / 80
Recommended
(A) mounting (pcs)
conductors (mm2)
4P 63 16 41941 3 / 60
80 25 41942 3 / 60
100 35 41943 3 / 60
Circuit breakers
25
Isolating switches ISS2 125…800A series www.elmarkgroup.eu
The series load isolating switch ISS2 xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for disconnection of the
circuits, switching on of generators because of the fact they are not affected by the frequency variations. High
mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and secure management. There is a possibility for the
products to be produced with an window for visible disconnection.
Functions:
- switching on and off of electrical circuits under load
- disconnection of electrical circuits
- used as main circuit-breaker
- resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the protected circuit
Technical features:
* Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz A2
* Double connector: screw connection
* Connection: solid or flexible conductors
Documentation corresponding * Insulation voltage: ≥1000V
to the product: * Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V
Standard EN 60947-1 * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): ≥5 000
EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6 * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): ≥10 000
* Protection ratio: IP>20
The devices are in accordance * Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts
with the directives of EC “Low * Plastic resistant to UV raysPlastic resistant to UV rays
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Ambient temperature: -20°÷40ºС
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directives (EMC) no. 89/336
EEC”.
Dimensions
Type
A B С D E J J1 K R S T Y
ISS2-125 140 135 125 27 73 120 120 65 20 25 3.5 25

ISS2-160 140 135 125 27 73 120 120 65 20 25 3.5 25
ISS2-250 180 170 138 35 86 160 160 90 25 30 3.5 25
MG2-400 230 240 165 50 110 210 210 140 32 40 5 37
MG2-630 230 260 165 50 110 210 210 140 40 50 6 37
MG2-800 378 312 240 50 140 353 353 175 60 56 8 48
Maximum Tightening Catalogue

Type Rated current breaking Box / carton
moment number
In(A) capacity (pcs)
Icu(A) (Nm)
ISS2-125in 125 1250 6.5 41951 1 / 12

ISS2-125out 125 1250 6.5 41952 1 / 12
ISS2-160in 160 1250 6.5 41953 1 / 12
ISS2-160out 160 1250 6.5 41954 1 / 12
ISS2-250in 250 2000 10 41955 1/6
ISS2-250out 250 2000 10 41956 1/6
ISS2-400in 400 3200 14.5 41957 1/2
ISS2-630in 630 4000 14.5 41958 1/2
ISS2-800in 800 1000 27 41959 1/2
Note: ISS2-xxx in – load circuit-breaker for mounting in the interior of a board
ISS2 -xxx out – load circuit-breaker with an extended lever for mounting on the front panel of the board
Circuit breakers
26
Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M from 125 to 800А
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The series load isolating switch EQ 2 M xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for disconnection of the
circuits, manual switching between two power supplies or switching ON of generators because of the fact they are not
affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and secure
management. There is a possibility for the products to be produced with an window for visible disconnection.
Functions:
- switching on and off of low voltage electrical circuits under load
- disconnection of the electrical circuit from one of the power supplies, while providing immediately switching to the
other
- used as main switch
- resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the protected circuit
A2 Technical characteristics:
* Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz
* Double connector: screw connection
Documentation corresponding * Connection: hard or flexible conductors
to the product: * Insulation voltage: ≥1000V
Standard EN 60947-1 * Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V
EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6 * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): ≥5 000
* Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): ≥10 000
The devices are in accordance * Protection ratio: IP>20
with the directives of EC “Low * Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Plastic resistant to UV rays
73/23 EEC” and * Ambient temperature: -20°÷40ºС
“Electromagnetic Compatibility * Option for moving the handle on the front panel of the board
Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 * Small size
EEC”. * Indication which of the two supplies is operating
Dimensions
Type
A B С D E J J1 K R S T Y
ЕQ2M-160 270 135 212 104 150 120 120 95 20 25 3.5 25

ЕQ2M-250 307 170 260 110 180 160 160 115 25 30 3.5 25
ЕQ2M-400 372 240 297 150 236 210 210 180 32 40 5 37
ЕQ2M-630 372 240 297 150 236 210 210 180 40 50 6 37
ЕQ2M-800 372 240 297 150 236 353 353 180 60 56 8 48
Maximum Tightening
Type Rated current breaking Catalogue Box / carton
moment
In(A) capacity number (pcs)
Icu(A) (Nm)
ЕQ2M-160 160 1250 6.5 44641 1/4

ЕQ2M-250 250 2000 10 44642 1/2
ЕQ2M-400 400 3200 14.5 44643 1/2
ЕQ2M-630 630 4000 14.5 44644 1/2
ЕQ2M-800 800 1000 27 44645 1/2
Circuit breakers
27
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A
www.elmarkgroup.eu
A3
13
14
13
15 16
COVER TERMINAL PLASTIC PLATE
TERMINALS CONTACTS WITH BIMETAL PLATES
NON-FLAMABLE BASE THERMAL SYSTEM WITH MOVABLE CONTACTS
STATIC CONTACTS UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE - UVR (accessory)
PART FROM THE COVER 13 REMOTE CONTROL – electrical (accessory)
SCREWS FOR TERMINALS 14 AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory)
ARC CHAMBERS 15 SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)
ELEMENT FOR ADJUSTMENT 16 REMOTE CONTROL – manual (accessory)

Circuit breakers
28
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN 60947-1 Functions:

EN 60947-2 - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
- breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers
The breakers are in accordance - can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations
with the directives of EC “Low - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit
voltage directives (LVD) no. - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
73/23 EEC” and - control: manual
“Electromagnetic Compatibility - possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for automation
Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 Technical data:
EEC”. * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
A3 * Isolating voltage: 2000V
* Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal for the breakers up to 160A and
a bolt connection for the breakers from 250A to 1600A
* Connecting:
- rigid or flexible conductors
- front conductors joining
- possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal H
* Plastic elements H1
- not keeping the burning material nylon PA66
- box permitivity strength: >16MV/m e
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C d
* Static contacts – alloy: pure copper T2Y2
- contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
- thickness: depends on the current
L2
L1
B
L
* IP code: IP>20
* Mounting:
- joining with bolts
A
- mounting position: vertical
W1
* Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
W
* Test button
* Ambient temperature: -20°÷55ºС
Type Overall dimensions (mm) Installation dimensions (mm)
W L H L1 H1 A B W1 L2 Жd Жe
DS1-125 76.2 120 70 90 25 100 50 4
DS1-160 90 120 70 93 30 100 60 5
DS1-250 105 170 104 238 143.5 35 139 70 210 6 8.5
DS1-400 140 257 104 316 144 44 214 87.5 285 6 11
DS1-630 210 275 104 310 172 70 230 140 280 6 11
DS1-800 210 275 104 347 172 70 230 140 307 6 16
DS1-1600 210 410 140 410 210 70 300 140 350 10 12
Type Rated current Operating Maximum Thermal Section of the Catalogue Package / Box
In (A) breaking breaking current conductor number (pcs)
capacity capacity (кА)Icu adjustment (A) (mm2)
(kA) Ics 400V 690V
DS1-125 40 16 25 10 fixed 16 44040 1 / 20

DS1-125 50 16 25 10 fixed 16 44050 1 / 20
DS1-125 63 16 25 10 fixed 25 44063 1 / 20
DS1-125 80 16 25 10 fixed 25 44080 1 / 20
DS1-125 100 16 25 10 fixed 35 44090 1 / 20
DS1-125 125 16 25 10 fixed 50 44125 1 / 20
Circuit breakers
29
www.elmarkgroup.eu
(kA) Ics
400V 690V
DS1 - 160 100 16 25 10 70 - 100 50 44165 1 / 16
DS1 - 160 160 22 35 15 112 - 160 70 44160 1 / 16
A3
(kA) Ics
400V 690V
DS1 - 250 200 35 50 15 140 - 200 120 44200 1/6

DS1 - 250 250 35 50 15 175 - 250 120 44250 1/6
(kA) Ics
400V 690V
DS1 - 400 400 50 65 25 320 - 400 240 44400 1/3

DS1 - 400 400 50 65 25 fixed 240 44401 1/3
(kA) Ics
400V 690V
DS1 - 630 500 65 75 25 fixed 2 x 185 44500 1/2

DS1 - 630 630 65 75 25 fixed 2 x 185 44630 1/2
(kA) Ics
400V 690V
DS1 - 800 800 75 85 30 fixed 2 x 240 44800 1/2

Circuit breakers
30
High capacity circuit breakers DS1 to 1600A – electronic type (MCCB)
www.elmarkgroup.eu

EN 60947-2 - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
ROHS sertificate: - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers
№ A07082429F2801 - can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations
- endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit
- remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
The breakers are in accordance - control: manual
with the directives of EC “Low - possibilities for electrical module parameters adjustment through direct modules (combination of keys) thus providing
voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 accurate protection from overload and short circuit
EEC” and “Electromagnetic - simultaneous protection of the three phases
Compatibility Directives (EMC) - possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for automation
A3 no. 89/336 EEC”. - contactor for TT test 15V DC
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz
* Connecting:
- possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal
* IP code: IP>20
* Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C
* Mounting:
* Test button
L I
0.4 OFF TEST
0.5 1.5 15V dc
L
0.6 l1 2 l3 In=~630A t
0.7 4 o+
0.8 6 o-
0.9 8
0.95 xln 10 Xl1
1
A 3S t1
B 6S I
t1
C 12S
D 18S l=6l1 I
I1 I3
Protecting functions:
Function L – step adjustment for protection against overload. Adjustment of the operating current I1=0.4+1xIn with discreet
coefficients as the value can be 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.7; 0.8; 0.9; 0.95 and 1
Time delay adjustment t1 of the protection against overload – step adjustment with four values A-3s; B-6s; C-12s; D-18s
when current is I=6I1. The diagram of the current curves is presented on fig.1
Adjustment of the transitory protection current against short circuit I3=X x I1 where X can take discreet value OFF; 1.5; 2;
4; 6; 8; 10
(kA) Ics 400V 690V
DS1-400/3300 400 50 65 25 160 - 400 240 44940 1/3
DS1-630/3300 630 65 75 25 252 - 630 2x185 44963 1/2
DS1-800/3300 800 65 75 30 320 - 800 2x240 44980 1/2
DS1-1250 1000 75 85 50 400 - 1000 2x240 44999 1/1
DS1-1250 1250 75 85 50 500 - 1250 2x240 44925 1/1
DS1-1600 1600 75 85 50 640 - 1600 2x240 44960 1/1
Fig.1
Circuit breakers
31
Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)
www.elmarkgroup.eu
According to the way of mounting the auxiliary devices can be divided into two groups:
- internal devices – accessories for whose mounting it is necessary to dismount the cover of the breakers and fix
them in specially designed jacks
- external devices – they are mounted right on the top cover of the breaker
INTERNAL DEVICES
Auxiliary contact (OF)

The device changes its condition conformably to the breaker's condition; it has a NO and a NC contactor.
Technical data:
- for breakers up to 160A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 3A
- for breakers from 250 to 800A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 6A A3
- available joining conductors
- labeling of the cables
Mounting:
Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting
Note:
The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
Documentation corresponding Connecting:
to the product: Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
Standard EN 60947-1
EN 60947-2
The devices are in accordance Type of the Catalogue Type of the Catalogue Type of the Catalogue
breaker number breaker number breaker number
with the directives of EC “Low
voltage directives (LVD) no. DS1 125/40+OF 44301 DS1 160/160+OF 44307 DS1 800/800+OF 44313
73/23 EEC” and DS1 125/50+OF 44302 DS1 250/200+OF 44308 DS1 1600/1000+OF 44314
“Electromagnetic Compatibility DS1 125/63+OF 44303 DS1 250/250+OF 44309 DS1 1600/1250+OF 44315
Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 DS1 125/80+OF 44304 DS1 400/400+OF 44310 DS1 1600/1600+OF 44316
EEC”. DS1 125/100+OF 44305 DS1 630/500+OF 44311
DS1 125/125+OF 44306 DS1 630/630+OF 44312
Shunt release (MX)

The device is used for remote control of breakers as at voltage signal it starts operating and switches off the breaker to
which it is mounted
Technical data:
- rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50/60Hz
- electromagnetic coil 100VA for breakers up to 400A
- electromagnetic coil 150VA for breakers 630-800A
Mounting:
Note:
The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
Connecting :
Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
Type of the Operating Catalogue Type of the Operating Catalogue Type of the Operating Catalogue
breaker voltage (V)) number breaker voltage (V) number breaker voltage (V) number
DS1 125/40+MX 400 44317 DS1 160/160+MX+OF 400 44345 DS1 1250/1000+MX 400 44371
DS1 125/40+MX 230 44318 DS1 160/160+MX+OF 230 44346 DS1 1250/1000+MX 230 44372
DS1 125/40+MX+OF 400 44319 DS1 250/200+MX 400 44347 DS1 1250/1000+MX+OF 400 44373
DS1 125/50+MX 400 44321 DS1 250/200+MX+OF 400 44349 DS1 1250/1250+MX 400 44375
DS1 125/50+MX 230 44322 DS1 250/200+MX+OF 230 44350 DS1 1250/1250+MX 230 44376
DS1 125/63+MX 400 44326 DS1 250/250+MX+OF 400 44353 DS1 1600/1600+MX 400 44379
DS1 125/63+MX 230 44327 DS1 250/250+MX+OF 230 44354 DS1 1600/1600+MX 230 44380
DS1 125/80+MX 400 44331 DS1 400/400+MX+OF 400 44357 DS1 400/3300+MX 400 44451
DS1 125/80+MX 230 44332 DS1 400/400+MX+OF 230 44358 DS1 400/3300+MX 230 44452
DS1 125/100+MX 400 44336 DS1 630/500+MX+OF 400 44361 DS1 630/3300+MX 400 44455
DS1 125/100+MX 230 44337 DS1 630/500+MX+OF 230 44362 DS1 630/3300+MX 230 44456
DS1 125/125+MX 400 44340 DS1 630/630+MX+OF 400 44365 DS1 800/3300+MX 400 44459
DS1 125/125+MX 230 44341 DS1 630/630+MX+OF 230 44366 DS1 800/3300+MX 230 44460
DS1 160/160+MX 400 44333 DS1 800/800+MX+OF 400 44369
DS1 160/160+MX 230 44344 DS1 800/800+MX+OF 230 44370
Circuit breakers
32
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Under voltage release (MN)

The device switches off and/or does not allow the switching on of the breaker to which it is mounted at power breakdown
or voltage decrease under certain limits
Technical data:
- operating voltage: 230/400V 50Hz
- electromagnetic coil 6VA for breakers up to 400A
- electromagnetic coil 10VA for breakers 630-800A
- switches off at voltage decrease under 75% of the operating
Mounting:
A3 DS1 - 250-800 Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory
Connecting:
Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors
Type of the Operating Catalogue Type of the Operating Catalogue
breaker voltage (V) number breaker voltage (V) number
DS1 125/40+MN 400 44383 DS1 250/250+MN 400 44419
DS1 125/40+MN 230 44384 DS1 250/250+MN 230 44420
DS1 125/40+MN+OF 400 44385 DS1 250/250+MN+OF 400 44421
DS1 125/40+MN+OF 230 44386 DS1 250/250+MN+OF 230 44422
DS1 125/50+MN 400 44387 DS1 400/400+MN 400 44423
DS1 125/50+MN 230 44388 DS1 400/400+MN 230 44424
DS1 125/50+MN+OF 400 44389 DS1 400/400+MN+OF 400 44425
DS1 125/50+MN+OF 230 44390 DS1 400/400+MN+OF 230 44426
DS1 125/63+MN 400 44391 DS1 630/500+MN 400 44427
DS1 125/63+MN 230 44392 DS1 630/500+MN 230 44428
DS1 125/63+MN+OF 400 44393 DS1 630/500+MN+OF 400 44429
DS1 125/63+MN+OF 230 44394 DS1 630/500+MN+OF 230 44430
DS1 - 125-160 DS1 125/80+MN 400 44395 DS1 630/630+MN 400 44431
DS1 125/80+MN 230 44396 DS1 630/630+MN 230 44432
DS1 125/80+MN+OF 400 44397 DS1 630/630+MN+OF 400 44433
DS1 125/80+MN+OF 230 44398 DS1 630/630+MN+OF 230 44434
DS1 125/100+MN 400 44399 DS1 800/800+MN 400 44435
DS1 125/100+MN 230 44402 DS1 800/800+MN 230 44436
DS1 125/100+MN+OF 400 44405 DS1 800/800+MN+OF 400 44437
DS1 125/100+MN+OF 230 44406 DS1 800/800+MN+OF 230 44438
DS1 125/125+MN 400 44407 DS1 1250/1000+MN 400 44439
DS1 125/125+MN 230 44408 DS1 1250/1000+MN 230 44440
DS1 125/125+MN+OF 400 44409 DS1 1250/1000+MN+OF 400 44441
DS1 125/125+MN+OF 230 44410 DS1 1250/1000+MN+OF 230 44442
DS1 160/160+MN 400 44411 DS1 1250/1250+MN 400 44443
DS1 160/160+MN 230 44412 DS1 1250/1250+MN 230 44444
DS1 160/160+MN+OF 400 44413 DS1 1250/1250+MN+OF 400 44445
DS1 160/160+MN+OF 230 44414 DS1 1250/1250+MN+OF 230 44446
DS1 250/200+MN 400 44415 DS1 1600/1600+MN 400 44447
DS1 250/200+MN 230 44416 DS1 1600/1600+MN 230 44448
DS1 250/200+MN+OF 400 44417 DS1 1600/1600+MN+OF 400 44449
DS1 250/200+MN+OF 230 44418 DS1 1600/1600+MN+OF 230 44450
EXTERNAL DEVICES
Remote control (manual)
Description:
The device switches off/on the breaker to which manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted
- two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90°C
Mounting:
The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is mounted at the door of the
distribution box, using an extension axis it is joined to the base
scheme 1
Table with the dimensions for manual remote control
Type of the Type Catalogue Package Type of the Dimensions (mm)
breaker number (pcs) breaker
A B C Dmin Dmax
DS1 125A ELMARK HDC 44967 1 HDC DS 1 125A 25 50 50 65 115

Circuit breakers
33
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Device for remote control (electrical)

Description:
The device switches off/on the breaker to which it is mounted, at electrical signal it allows control from a great distance
Technical data:
- operating voltage of the executive mechanism: 230/400V 50/60Hz
- two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90°C
- two types of executive mechanism:
* magnetic operation for breakers DS1 up to 160A
* motor operation for breakers DS1 from 250 to 800A
Mounting:
DS1 - 125-160 The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 and 2), and buttons on/off are fixed at the door of the A3
distribution box and at the remote control device
Type of the Operating Type Catalogue Package

breaker voltage number (pcs)
DS1 125 400V ELMARK ADC 44907 1

DS1 160 400V ELMARK ADC 44908 1
DS1 250 400V ELMARK ADC 44909 1
DS1 400 400V ELMARK ADC 44910 1
DS1 630 400V ELMARK ADC 44911 1
DS1 800 400V ELMARK ADC 44911 1
DS1 125 230V ELMARK ADC 44912 1
DS1 160 230V ELMARK ADC 44913 1
DS1 250 230V ELMARK ADC 44914 1
DS1 - 250-1600 DS1 400 230V ELMARK ADC 44915 1
DS1 630 230V ELMARK ADC 44916 1
DS1 800 230V ELMARK ADC 44916 1
DS1 1600 230V ELMARK ADC 44924 1
DS1 1600 400V ELMARK ADC 44926 1
scheme 1 scheme 2
Table with the dimensions for remote control

Type of the Dimensions (mm)
breaker
A А1 B1 B2 H
АDC DS 1 125 103.5 110 30 90 92

ADC DS 1 160 103.5 110 35 90 92
ADC DS 1 250 139 - 132 - 105
ADC DS 1 400 226 - 132 - 132
ADC DS 1 630/800 226 - 132 - 132
Terminal extension accessories

Straight copper tin-plated terminals provide the bringing of the cable connection out of the terminals of the breaker and
guarantee a firm connection
According to the breaker’s capacity we offer terminal extension sets with various section
Mounting:
Mounted with bolts right to the terminal outlets of the breaker with the base
Type Rated current (А) Catalogue number Package (pcs)
ТP 125 125 31125 6

TP 160 160 31160 6
TP 250 250 31250 6
TP 400 400 31400 6
TP 630 630 31630 6
Circuit breakers
34
www.elmarkgroup.eu
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 63…1250A
Overall dimensions (mm)

d
Type of the breaker
W L H H1
DS2-63 76 142 70 77
DS2-100 91 155 61 73
L
DS2-225 106 165 80 90

DS2-400 148 256 95 110
W
H DS2-500 180 270 103 115
H1
A4 DS2-630 180 270 103 115

DS2-800 210 275 95 115
DS2-1250 210 330(460) 137 200
Functions:
- switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
- can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations
- control: manual
Technical data:
* Connecting:
- possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal
* IP code: IP>20
* Mounting:
* Test button
Max. Operating Operating

Type Rated current breaking Protection from Catalogue Package / Box
In (A) breaking breaking overload number (pcs)
capacity (kA) Icu capacity (кА)Ics capacity (mm2)
DS2 - 63 63 18 12 16 fixed 44006 1 / 12

DS2 - 100 100 22 15 35 fixed 44010 1 / 12

Circuit breakers
35
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 63…1250A
www.elmarkgroup.eu

DS2 - 225 225 35 25 70 fixed 44022 1 / 12
A4

DS2 - 400 400 42 35 180 fixed 44004 1 / 12

DS2 - 630 500 50 42 240 fixed 44005 1/2

DS2 - 630 630 50 42 240 fixed 44036 1/2

DS2 - 800 800 65 48 240 fixed 44008 1/1

DS2 - 1250 1000 85 65 240 fixed 44000 1/1

DS2 - 1250 1250 85 65 240 fixed 44502 1/1
Circuit breakers
36
www.elmarkgroup.eu High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series
The DW1 series is an intelligent type circuit breaker used to control and protect low
voltage electrical distribution network. Possibility to set the parameters of the circuit
protection, built in under voltage release, remote control, earth protection and load
monitoring.
Functions:
- switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits
- used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations
A5 - motor control
- mounted auxiliary devices for automation - under voltage release, earth
protection, intelligent controlling block with a possibility for a choice of the protected
function
Technical data:
* Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the power supply rail
* Connecting:
- copper rails
- busway connection – at the back
Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-2; IEC 947-2 * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥500
The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥9000
voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic * IP code: IP54
Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”. * Mounting:
- clamping with bolts
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum 5°
* Test button
* Installation altitude: up to 2000m
Basic protective functions:
* Overload protection with long time delay
* Short circuit protection with short time delay, time inversion limit
Center of the
Center of the installation * Short circuit protection with short time delay, time fixed limit
installation opening
opening * Instantaneous short circuit protection
* Earth protection function
* Full stability function
* “Overload alarm” function
Side special level , wiring terminal * Test function
* Auto diagnostics function
A commutation type of breakers with RS 485 connection for duplex transmission of all
function parameters, adjustment and data can also be produced at client's order and
delivery terms agreement.
Starndart
level Outside dimensions
DW1 2000A DW1 3200A

A 340 352
H 402 432
W 362 435
B 150 175
L 373 507
L1 290 448
H1 52 92
Installation openings
Center of the H2 112 112
installation
opening
H3 20 30
W1/W2 95 115
Instalation L5
base
17 17
L6 40 40
L7 82 82
W3-W5 60 100
Ø 12 12
Circuit breakers
37
High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series www.elmarkgroup.eu
Connecting scheme
Main Emergency Electrical Electrical
circuit Intelligent controller breaking breaking closing Auxiliary switches
J21
Accumulated Break
SB2
Closed
Fault
energy
SB1 SB3
3 5 7 9 25 27 29 31 33 35 36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 XT
A5
Q F X M
0 0
Main loop SA Control
power power supply
supply DF
3(or4)
6(or8) Process
unit
(+) (-)
1 2 4 6 8 26 28 30 32 34 37 40 43 46
Operating
power supply AC380V/220V
DC power supply module
U1(+) U2(-)
DC220V¡ 110V
Type Rated current Rated voltage Breaking capacity Electrical Mechanical Catalogue Package / Box
In (A) Un (V) (кА) wear resistance wear resistance number (pcs)
(number of cycles) (number of cycles)
DW1 - 2000 2000 690 80 500 9500 44209 1/1
2500 690 100 500 9500 44255 1/1

DW1 - 3200
3200 690 100 500 9500 44329 1/1
Circuit breakers
38
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS)
Standard EN 60947-1 The system for dual power change-over switch EQ1 is designed to provide continuous power supply and two electrical
EN 60947-2; EN 60947-6-1 sources automatic switch in case of failure or deviation from the set parameters.
The system for dual power change-over switch consists of two high capacity circuit breakers mounted on a metal frame
The breakers are in accordance connected with common operating mechanism and controlled by a command device that controls the system parameters'
with the directives of EC “Low correspondence.
Functions:
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits at main power supply discrepancy
73/23 EEC” and * Switching to dual power change-over at power supply phase lack
“Electromagnetic Compatibility * Breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers
Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 * Used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations supplied with a generator or a second power
EEC”. supply source (hospitals, post offices, military sites, control rooms)
A6 * Remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
* Control: motor
* Controls the following circuit parameters:
- presence of the three phases
- the phase voltage to be in the set limits
- overload
- short circuit at the outlet
Technical data:
* Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the power supply rail
* Connecting:
- copper rails
- flexible or rigid conductors
* IP code: IP21
* Mounting:
- clamping with bolts
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum 5°
* Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-flammable
Basic functions of the control device:
* Overload protection
* Instantaneous short circuit protection
* Under phase protection
* Possibility for setting the change-over time between the two sources – min 3s
* Possibility for automatic switch-over to the main power supply source after restoring its parameters
The system for dual power change-over switch is offered in two types:
- with display (control device) mounted on the mounting plate (integrated type)
- with separated control display
Dimensions for ABP Eq1

Dimensions (mm)
Type of
the breaker А В С D H
inner type
EQ1 - 100 480 240 450 210 140
EQ1 - 225 480 240 450 210 140
EQ1 - 400 620 300 590 270 235
main alternative EQ1 - 630 660 300 630 270 240
power power
supply supply
moved type
EQ1 - 100 420 230 390 200 145
EQ1 - 225 420 230 390 200 145
EQ1 - 400 570 300 540 270 235
EQ1 - 630 610 300 580 270 240
Max. Operating Section of the Electrical

Type Rated current power supply Catalogue Package / Box
breaking breaking wear resistance
In (A) 2
conductor (mm ) (number of cycles) number (pcs)
capacity (kA) Icu capacity (кА) Ics
EQ1 - 100 100 22 15 35 6000 44100 1/1
EQ1 - 225 225 35 25 70 6000 44225 1/1
EQ1 - 400 400 42 35 180 6000 44403 1/1
EQ1 - 630 630 50 42 240 6000 44633 1/1
EQ1 - 100* 100 22 15 35 6000 44101 1/1

EQ1 - 225* 225 35 25 70 6000 44226 1/1
EQ1 - 400* 400 42 35 180 6000 44404 1/1
EQ1 - 630* 630 50 42 240 6000 44634 1/1
Note: *Dual power change-over switch with separated control display

Indirect protection devices
39
Residual current devices JVL 1 www.elmarkgroup.eu
COVER
TERMINALS
NON-FLAMABLE BASE
CONTACT
TEST BUTTON
SECONDARY WINDING OF TT
PRIMARY WINDING B1
SUMMING CURRENT TRANSFORMER (TT) WITH TOROID
ELECTROMAGNETIC RELAY
BREAKING (RELEASE) UNIT

40
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Residual current devices JVL1 series (RCD)
Standard EN 61008-1 The residual current device works with no extra power supply to the operating mechanism. It compares the magnitude of
EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1 the currents through the neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the
secondary winding form a measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic
The breakers are in accordance fields generated at electrical current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the
with the directives of EC “Low conductors or at presence of a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the magnetic fields can not be
voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 neutralized. This residual field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. The device breaks
EEC” and “Electromagnetic when the value of this current exceeds the limit value of the residual current breaker.
Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. Functions:
89/336 EEC”. - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage
- used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel
- control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at exit failure
B1 Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50/60 Hz
* Rated current: according to the table
* Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
* Time delay until break: <0.1s at I ∆ n and <0.04s at 2I ∆ n
* Short circuit current wear resistance: 6000A
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A
* Type of the plastic:
- material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66
- permitivity strength: >18MV/m
* Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
* Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type
* IP code: IP>20
* Indication for operating (switched on) position
* Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-flammable
Connecting:
- power supply busbar (only for bipolar)
- flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section
Mounting:
- on DIN-rail
The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing
conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have three- or five-conductor grid
with separate protective conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors). The corpus of the
consumer depending on the grid type must be connected either to the protective conductor or be earthed.
Fig.1
41
Residual current devices JVL1 series (RCD) www.elmarkgroup.eu
Dimensions
36 74.5 72
N
N
T
TEST
T
TEST
65
85
35.5
OFF
85
OFF
B1
Catalogue number
Number Rated current Package / Box
Leakage current I D
n(mA)
of poles In (A) ( pcs)
30 100 300 500
2 10.0 40210 40212 40213 40214 1 / 60
2 16.0 40216 40217 40218 40219 1 / 60
2 20.0 40292 40293 40294 40295 1 / 60
2 25.0 40221 40222 40223 40224 1 / 60
2 32.0 40231 40232 40233 40234 1 / 60
2 40.0 40241 40242 40243 40244 1 / 60
2 63.0 40261 40262 40263 40264 1 / 60
2 80.0 40281 40282 40283 40284 1 / 60
Catalogue number
Number Rated current Package / Box
of poles In (A) Leakage current I D
n(mA)
( pcs)
30 100 300 500
4 10.0 40410 40412 40413 40414 1 / 30
4 16.0 40416 40417 40418 40419 1 / 30
4 20.0 40492 40493 40494 40495 1 / 30
4 25.0 40421 40422 40423 40424 1 / 30
4 32.0 40431 40432 40433 40434 1 / 30
4 40.0 40441 40442 40443 40444 1 / 30
4 63.0 40461 40462 40463 40464 1 / 30
4 80.0 40481 40482 40483 40484 1 / 30
Connecting scheme
consumer
R JVL1 2P
S
T JVL1 4P
consumer
PE N
42
Combined circuit breakers with residual current device JVL5 (RCD)
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard EN60 898-1; Description of the operating system:

EN 61 008-1; EN 61008-2; It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current electromagnetic device. It combines the properties of
EN 60947-1 the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts at short circuit or overload in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic
residual current device - at failure in the conductors’ insulation. It compares the magnitude of the currents through the
The breakers are in accordance neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary winding form a
with the directives of EC “Low measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields generated at electrical
voltage directives (LVD) no. current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the conductors or at presence of
73/23 EEC” and a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual magnetic
“Electromagnetic Compatibility field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. When the value of this current exceeds the limit
Directives (EMC) value of the residual current breaker the device breaks and the residual current device switches off from the power supply
no. 89/336 EEC”. grid. The device operates without any extra power supply to the electromagnetic residual current and is not influenced by
voltage varying or decreasing.
Functions:
B2 - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short circuit or overload
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers
- control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at failure in the insulation after the breaker
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230V 50 Hz
* Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table
* Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
* Time delay until break:
- of the residual current device: <0.1s at I ∆ n and <0.04s at 2I ∆ n
- of the circuit breaker: <0.1s
* Circuit breaker breaking curve: C
* Surge voltage wear resistance:≥2000V
* Breaking capacity: 6000A
* Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A
* Type of the plastic:
- material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66
- dielectrical strength: >18MV/m
* Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)
* Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥5000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥10000
* IP code: IP>20
* Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable
* Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 45Cْ
Connecting:
Mounting:
- on DIN-rail
conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have three- or five-conductor grid
with separate operating neutral conductor (N) and separate protecting conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT
with three or five conductors).
Combined electromagnetic residual current device and circuit breaker 1P 6kA

Type Number of Breaking Sections of Rated current Catalogue number Package / Box
designation poles of capacity the mounting (A) (pcs)
the residual Leakage Leakage Leakage Leakage
current (kA) conductors
device/circuit (mm2) current current current current
breaker IΔ n (30mА) IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)
JVL5 2 6 1.5 10 40010 40011 40013 40015 7 / 140

JVL5 2 6 2.5 16 40016 40017 40018 40019 7 / 140
JVL5 2 6 4.0 25 40025 40021 40023 40026 7 / 140
JVL5 2 6 6.0 32 40032 40031 40033 40035 7/ 140
JVL5 2 6 10.0 40 40040 40041 40043 40045 7 / 140
43
Combined circuit breakers with residual current device www.elmarkgroup.eu
Standard H
EN60 898-1 EN 61 009-1 L L
42.5±0.31
EN 61009-2 EN 60947-1
The breakers are in accordance

45±0.31
voltage directives (LVD) no.
35±0.50
73/23 EEC” and
Directives (EMC) no. 89/336
EEC”.
Geometrical dimensions B3
1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N
Description of the operating system:
L(mm) 44 62 88 115.5 It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current electromagnetic device. It combines part of the
H(mm) 95 95 95 95 properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts at short circuit in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic
residual current device - at failure in the conductors’ insulation. It compares the rate of the currents through the conductors
Type designation in an electronic comparator. The residual current device operates normally at voltage feed. The voltage is needed for the
comparator’s energizing – a semi-conductor element with constantly set leakage current rate. This rate is compared with
C4xLE constructive series the actual rate. When the margin of the comparison is neutral, the residual current device does not operate, but at failure
electrical protection in the protected circuit insulation when it exceeds the set margin it operates and switches off the protection.
number of poles (1; 2; 3; 4) For the normal operation of the residual current device, the power supplying circuit voltage must be over 170V and there
circuit breaker capacity must be no time variation.
Cx rated current Functions:
breaking curve - C - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short circuit or overload
- switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers
- control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at exit failure
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50 Hz
* Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table
* Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA
* Time delay until break:
- of the residual current device: <0.1s at I ∆ n and <0.04s at 2I ∆ n
- of the circuit breaker: <0.1s
* Circuit breaker breaking curve: C
* Breaking capacity: 4500A
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥500
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥2000
* IP code: IP>20
Connecting:
- power supply busbar (for two- or three polar)
Mounting:
- on DIN-rail
conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have separate conductors for
operational neutral conductor (N) and protective conductor (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors).
44
Combined circuit breakers with residual current device
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Combined electronic residual current device 1P + N

It compares the leakage current between the phase and neutral conductors.
Type Number of Breaking Sections of Rated Cat. number Package/Box
poles of
designation the residual capacity the mounting current Leakage Leakage Leakage Leakage (pcs)
current (kA) conductors (A) current current current current
device/circuit IΔ n (30mА) IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)
breaker (mm2)
C41LE C10 2 4.5 1.5 10 40110 40111 40113 40114 7 / 140
C41LE C16 2 4.5 2.5 16 40116 40117 40118 40119 7 / 140
C41LE C25 2 4.5 4.0 25 40125 40121 40123 40126 7 / 140
C41LE C40 2 4.5 10.0 40 40140 40141 40133 40145 7 / 140
C41LE C50 2 4.5 16.0 50 40163 40161 40136 40165 7 / 140
B3
Combined electronic residual current device 2P

It compares the leakage current between the phase and neutral conductors or between two phases.
poles of
breaker (mm2)
C42LE C10 2 4.5 1.5 10 40211 40207 40208 40209 5 / 100
C42LE C16 2 4.5 2.5 16 40215 40245 40235 40237 5 / 100
C42LE C25 2 4.5 4.0 25 40225 40229 40230 40238 5 / 100
C42LE C40 2 4.5 10.0 40 40240 40204 40246 40268 5 / 100
C42LE C50 2 4.5 16.0 50 40265 40260 40236 40269 5 / 100
Combined electronic residual current device 3P

It compares the leakage current between three phases.
Type Number of Breaking Sections of Rated Cat. number Package / Box
poles of
breaker (mm2)
C43LE C10 3 4.5 1.5 10 40310 40311 40313 40314 3 / 60

C43LE C16 3 4.5 2.5 16 40316 40317 40318 40319 3 / 60
C43LE C25 3 4.5 4.0 25 40325 40321 40323 40324 3 / 60
C43LE C40 3 4.5 10.0 40 40340 40341 40343 40344 3 / 60
C43LE C50 3 4.5 16.0 50 40363 40361 40336 40365 3 / 60
Combined electronic residual current device 3P + N

It combines the leaking current between three phases and neutral conductors.
poles of
breaker (mm2)
C44LE C10 4 4.5 1.5 10 40411 40407 40408 40409 2 / 40

C44LE C16 4 4.5 2.5 16 40415 40445 40439 40438 2 / 40
C44LE C25 4 4.5 4.0 25 40425 40420 40428 40429 2 / 40
C44LE C40 4 4.5 10.0 40 40440 40404 40447 40446 2 / 40
C44LE C50 4 4.5 16.0 50 40465 40401 40436 40469 2 / 40
45
Surge arresters SPD type
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The surge arrestor consists of a semi-conductor valve element that opens at certain conditions. At normal conditions of
the system, the surge arrestor has infinitely high resistance between the protected conductors and earthing circuit. At
voltage increase due to atmospheric nature or system failure, the valve element opens and leads the excessive voltage to
the grounded circuit.
After reversion of the normal voltage the valve element closes. The arrestor can endure high momentary overloading.
Functions:
- protection of heavy-loaded electrical circuits from overload
- control: automatic switching off at exit failure and recovery after eliminating the danger
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage Uc: - the operating voltage of the surge arrester 275/440V; 50Hz
Documents corresponding to * Surge voltage Up: the voltage created in surge arrester terminals at rated discharge current running: according to the
the product: tables B4
Standard * Rated discharge current In – the rated value of discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20µs, which can be repeatedly
EN61 643-1 EN 61 643-1 led to the ground: according to the tables
* Full discharge current Imax – the peak value of the discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20µs, which the surge
The breakers are in accordance arrester can bear once: according to the table
with the directives of EC “Low * Constant operating current: up to 800μA for 1P, 2P and 3P; up to 600μA for 1P + N, 3P + N
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Indication for damaged surge arrester
73/23 EEC” and * Offered in types: 1P; 1P + N; 3P; 3P + N
“Electromagnetic Compatibility Connecting:
Directives (EMC) - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section
no. 89/336 EEC”. Mounting:
- on DIN-rail
- mounting in the distribution box on the front or right before the breaker according to the attached schemes
Three phase protection TN-C system Three phase protection TN-S system
consumer consumer
Monophase protection TT system Three phase protection IT system
consumer consumer
The surge arrester selection is made according to the overload risk level or atmosphere activity, named B, C or D
(from high to low risk level).
The company offers the following models of arresters:
Model SPD – Bxxxx – for systems with exceptionally high risk level. Mounted mainly in the beginning of the installation or
in the main panel.
Model SPD – Cxxxx – for systems with high or average risk level. Mounted in the beginning of the installation or before
the breaker.
Model SPD – Dxxxx – for systems with low risk level. Suitable for secondary protection of consumers in combination with
SPD – Bxxxx/SPD – Cxxxx
46
www.elmarkgroup.eu Surge arresters SPD type
voltage from
lightning
three phase
consumer
main
distribution
panel machine
panel mono phase
consumer
SPD-D/5
power discharge during the time
B4
Package / Box
Type of the arrester In (kA) Imax (kA) Uc (V) Up (kV) Catalogue number ( pcs)
SPD-D5/1p 5 10 275 1.2 64101 17 / 170
SPD-C10/1p 10 20 275 1.2 64102 17 / 170
SPD-C20/1p 20 40 275 1.8 64103 17 / 170
SPD-B40/1p 40 60 275 2 64104 17 / 170
Package / Box
SPD-D5/1pN 5 10 275 1.2 64201 8 / 80

SPD-C10/1pN 10 20 275 1.2 64202 8 / 80
SPD-C20/1pN 20 40 275 1.8 64203 8 / 80
SPD-B40/1pN 40 60 275 2 64204 8 / 80
Package / Box
SPD-D5/3p 5 10 440 1.2 64301 5 / 50
SPD-C10/3p 10 20 440 1.2 64302 5 / 50
SPD-C20/3p 20 40 440 1.8 64303 5 / 50
SPD-B40/3p 40 60 440 2 64304 5 / 50
Package / Box
SPD-D5/3pN 5 10 440 1.2 64401 4 / 40
SPD-C10/3pN 10 20 440 1.2 64402 4 / 40
SPD-C20/3pN 20 40 440 1.8 64403 4 / 40
SPD-B40/3pN 40 60 440 2 64404 4 / 40
Contactors
47
Low voltage contactors LT 1-K
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The LT 1-K contactors are specially designed to control alternating current circuits with low power of the consumers and
rated current up to 6A.
Functions:
- switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil
- making of control systems
- used as an operating element in process control panels
- reliable separation of power contactors
Technical data:
* Operation class: AC 3
* Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 690V; 50/60Hz
* Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
Documents corresponding to * Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC
the product: * Limits of the coil controlling voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
Standard * Joining terminal: screw terminal
EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-4-1 * Connecting:
- flexible conductors with or without cable terminal up to 4mm2 C1
The breakers are in accordance - rigid conductors
with the directives of EC “Low * Terminal tightening moment: up to1.3N,m
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥1000000
73/23 EEC” and * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
“Electromagnetic Compatibility * Mounting:
Directives (EMC) - on DIN-rail or
no. 89/336 EEC”. - with bolts to the surface
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)
Rated current in Rated capacity Type number Voltage (V) Catalogue Package / Box
AC-3 440V up to kW coil number ( pcs )
230 23061 1 / 100
220V 380V 660V 400 23062 1 / 100
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 12 23063 1 / 100
LT1 - K0610 24 23064 1 / 100
36 23065 1 / 100
6А 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 48 23066 1 / 100
110 23067 1 / 100
Contactors
48
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D
BASE
STATIC MAGNETIC CORE
COIL
REVERSE SPRING
MOVABLE MAGNETIC CORE
MOVABLE CONTACTS
LID
C2
STATIC CONTACTS
AUXILIARY CONTACT
SCREWS
Contactors
49
Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D www.elmarkgroup.eu
LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors for control of circuits and consumers operating in class AC3. It is
suitable for consumers with rated current up to 95A. The contactors are offered in a type with 1 NO contact for operating
circuit making and the models over 40A also have 1NC operating contactor.
Functions:
- switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil
- secured cover of the movable part of the contactor
Technical data:
Documents corresponding to * Operation class: AC 3
the product: * Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 690V; 50/60Hz
Standard EN 60947-1 * Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
EN 60 947-4-1 * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
The breakers are in accordance * Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC
with the directives of EC “Low C2
* Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Joining terminal: screw terminal
73/23 EEC” and * Connecting:
“Electromagnetic Compatibility - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
Directives (EMC) - rigid conductors
no. 89/336 EEC”. * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1000000
* Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 600 for 40-95A
* Pole leaking power: up to 13W
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
- with bolts to the surface
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
* Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C
* Altitude: up to 2000m
a ô
C
B
Type a b Type Аmax Bmax Cmax

LT1-D 09~32 A
LT-D 34/35 50/60 4.5 LT-D 47 76 82
09~12 09~12
LT1 34/35 50/60 4.5 LT1 47 76 87
D18 D18 C
LT1 40 48 4.5 LT1 57 86 95
D25 D25
LT1 40 48 4.5 LT1 57 86 100
B
D32 D32
LT1-D 40 100/110 6.5 LT1-D 77 129 116
40~65 40~65
LT1-D 40 100/110 6.5 LT1-D 87 129 127 a
80~95 80~95 LT1-D 40~95 A
Contactors
50
www.elmarkgroup.eu Low voltage contactors LT 1 – D
Type Rated Coil capacity Rated current Tightening Section of the Coil Catalogue Package/Box
number capacity (kW) (VA) in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m) power supply voltage (V) number
conductor
230 23091 1 / 50
220V 380V 660V 400 23092 1 / 50
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V closed open 12 23093 1 / 50
LT1 - D0910 24 23094 1 / 50
auxiliary contact 36 23095 1 / 50
1NO 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9А 1.7 4 48 23096 1 / 50
110 23097 1 / 50
conductor
230 23273 1 / 50
220V 380V 660V 400 23270 1 / 50
LT1 - D0901 24 23272 1 / 50
C2 1NC 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7 60 9А 1.7 4 48 23278 1 / 50
110 23279 1 / 50
conductor
230 23121 1 / 50
220V 380V 660V 400 23122 1 / 50
LT1 - D1210 24 23124 1 / 50
1NO 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12 А 1.7 4 48 23126 1 / 50
110 23127 1 / 50
conductor
230 23274 1 / 50
220V 380V 660V 400 23280 1 / 50
LT1 - D1201 24 23282 1 / 50
1NC 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7 60 12 А 1.7 4 48 23284 1 / 50
110 23285 1 / 50
Type Rated Coil capacity Rated current Tightening Section of the Coil Catalogue
power supply Package/Box
number capacity (kW) (VA) in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m) conductor voltage (V) number
230 23181 1 / 50
220V 380V 660V 400 23182 1 / 50
LT1 - D1810 24 23184 1 / 50
1NO 4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18 А 1.7 6 48 23186 1 / 50
110 23187 1 / 50
conductor
230 23275 1 / 50
220V 380V 660V 400 23286 1 / 50
LT1 - D1801 24 23288 1 / 50
1NC 4 7.5 9 9 10 7 60 18 А 1.7 6 48 23290 1 / 50
110 23291 1 / 50
conductor
230 23251 1 / 50
220V 380V 660V 400 23252 1 / 50
LT1 - D2510 24 23254 1 / 50
1NO 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25 А 2.5 6 48 23256 1 / 50
110 23257 1 / 50
Contactors
51
Low voltage contactors LT 1- D www.elmarkgroup.eu
number capacity (kW) (VA) in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m) power supply voltage (V) number ( pcs )
conductor
230 23276 1 / 50
220V 380V 660V 400 23292 1 / 50
LT1 - D2501 24 23294 1 / 50
1NC 5.5 11 11 11 15 7.5 90 25 А 2.5 6 48 23296 1 / 50
110 23297 1 / 50
conductor
230 23321 1 / 50
220V 380V 660V 400 23322 1 / 50
LT1 - D3210 24 23324 1 / 50
1NO 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 7.5 90 32 А 2.5 10 48 23326 1 / 50 C2
110 23327 1 / 50
conductor
230 23401 1 / 20
220V 380V 660V 400 23402 1 / 20
LT1 - D4011 24 23404 1 / 20
1NO+1NC 11 18.5 22 22 30 20 200 40 А 5 16 48 23406 1 / 20
110 23407 1 / 20
conductor
230 23501 1 / 20
220V 380V 660V 400 23502 1 / 20
LT1 - D5011 24 23504 1 / 20
1NO+1NC 15 22 25 25 33 20 200 50 А 5 25 48 23506 1 / 20
110 23507 1 / 20
conductor ( pcs )
230 23651 1 / 20
220V 380V 660V 400 23652 1 / 20
LT1 - D6511 24 23654 1 / 20
1NO+1NC 18.5 30 37 37 37 20 200 65 А 5 25 48 23656 1 / 20
110 23657 1 / 20
conductor ( pcs )
230 23801 1 / 15
220V 380V 660V 400 23802 1 / 15
LT1 - D8011 24 23804 1 / 15
1NO+1NC 22 37 45 45 45 20 200 80 А 9 50 48 23806 1 / 15
110 23807 1 / 15
conductor
230 23951 1 / 15
220V 380V 660V 400 23952 1 / 15
LT1 - D9511 24 23954 1 / 15
1NO+1NC 25 45 45 45 45 20 200 95 А 9 50 48 23956 1 / 15
110 23957 1 / 15
Contactors
52
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Low voltage contactors LT 1- F
The contactors LT 1- F are alternating current contactors used to control circuits and consumers operating in normal
working conditions with switching on /off the consumer and dirty working environment. They are suitable for consumers
with electrical power consumption from 115A to 800A.
Functions:
- frequently switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil
- making of systems for consumers’ control
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 1000V; 50/60Hz
* Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO
Documents corresponding to * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
the product: * Coil composition: pure coil copper QA-1 type
Standard EN 60947-1 * Magnetic core composition: steel alloy 360
* Movable part composition: bakelite
EN 60 947-4-1 * Rated voltage of the coil: 230 and 400V AC
The breakers are in accordance * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
C3 with the directives of EC “Low * Joining terminal: screw terminal
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Connecting:
- flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
73/23 EEC” and - rigid conductors
“Electromagnetic Compatibility - rail
Directives (EMC) * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
no. 89/336 EEC”. * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
* Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: 200
* Pole leaking power: from 16 to 80W
* Mounting:
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 10°C
Dimensions (mm):
Type a b c L M Q Q1 P
LT 1 F150 163.5 170 171 107 150 26 57.5 40
LT 1 F225 168.5 197 181 113.5 172 21 51.5 48
LT 1 F265 201.5 203 181 141 178 39 66.5 48
LT 1 F400 213 206 219 145 182 43 74 48
LT 1 F630 309 304 255 155 264 60 89 80
LT 1 F800 309 304 255 155 264 60 89 80
Type Motor rated Coil capacity Rated current Tightening Coil Catalogue Package / Box
number capacity (kW) (VA) in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m) voltage (V) number ( pcs )
220V 380V 660V 230 23111

400 23112
230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V closed open 12 23113
24 23114
LT1 - F115 36 23115
48 23116
LT1 - F115 30 55 59 59 59 80 60 54 660 115 A 18 110 23117 1/4
230 23151
400 23152
12 23153
LT1 - F150 24 23154
40 75 80 80 90 100 65 45 660 150 A 25 36 23155 1/4
LT1 - F150 48 23156
110 23157
230 23861
400 23862
LT1 - F225 12 23863
63 110 110 110 129 129 100 55 660 225 A 35 24 23864 1/2
LT1 - F225 36 23865
48 23866
110 23867
230 23261
400 23262
LT1 - F265 12 23263
75 132 140 140 160 160 147 66 966 265 A 35 24 23264 1/2
LT1 - F265 36 23265
48 23266
110 23267
LT1 - F400 230 23751

110 200 220 250 257 280 185 66 966 400 A 50 400 23752 1/1
LT1 - F400
LT1 - F630 230 23771

200 335 375 400 400 450 450 630 A 50 400 23772 1/1
LT1 - F630
LT1 - F800 230 23881 1/1

250 450 450 450 450 475 450 800 A 400 23882
LT1 - F800
Note: At mounting the containers from the series in control schemes a distance must be provided at the side of the contactor in case of eventual coil change.
Contactors
53
Low voltage contactors with direct current coil LP 1-D www.elmarkgroup.eu
The contactors LP1 D are alternating current contactors with constant current coil for control. The power plugs of the
contactor are designed for control of alternating current circuits and consumers operating in normal operating class AC-3
with frequently switching on/off the consumer and dirty working environment. The contactors are suitable for consumers
with electrical power consumption from 9A to 95A.
Functions:
- switching on/off alternating current consumers in direct current controlling schemes at controlling signal to the coil
- making of systems for consumers’ control
- reliable separation of power contacts
Technical data:
Documents corresponding to * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: from 12V DC to 220V DC
the product: * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V DC
Standard * insulation voltage: 690V
EN60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
* Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc C4
The products are in accordance * Joining terminal: screw terminal
with the directives of EC “Low * Connecting:
voltage directives (LVD) no. - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
73/23 EEC” and - rigid conductors a ô
“Electromagnetic Compatibility C
Directives (EMC) * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000
no. 89/336 EEC”. * Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A; 600 for 40-95A
B
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
- with bolts to the surface LP1-D 09~32 A
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable
C
(self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10ْ C + 60ْ C
B
a
LP1-D 40~95 A
Dimensions:
Type A max B max C a b

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm.)
LP 1 D0910 47 76 95 34/35 50/60

LP 1 D1210 47 76 95 34/35 50/60
LP 1 D1810 47 76 95 34/35 50
LP 1 D2510 57 86 101 40 50
LP 1 D3210 57 86 101 40 50
LP 1 D4011 77 129 176 40 100
LP 1 D5011 77 129 176 40 100
LP 1 D6511 77 129 176 40 100
LP 1 D9511 87 129 182 40 100
Type Rated Auxiliary Rated capacity of the consumer Catalogue number

current contact (kW) according to the coil voltage (V DC)
(А)
(pcs.) 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 12 24 36 48 110 230
LP 1 D0910 9 1NO 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 23962 23098 23130 23971 23980 23139
LP 1 D1210 12 1NO 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 23963 23128 23131 23972 23981 23140
LP 1 D1810 18 1NO 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 23964 23188 23132 23973 23982 23141
LP 1 D2510 25 1NO 5.5 11 11 11 15 23925 23258 23133 23974 23983 23142
LP 1 D3210 32 1NO 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 23966 23328 23134 23975 23984 23143
LP 1 D4011 40 1NO+1NC 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 30 23967 23408 23135 23976 23985 23144
LP 1 D5011 50 1NO+1NC 15 22 22 22 33 23968 23508 23136 23977 23986 23145
LP 1 D6511 65 1NO+1NC 18.5 30 30 30 37 23969 23658 23137 23978 23987 23146
LP 1 D9511 95 1NO+1NC 25 45 45 45 45 23970 23958 23138 23979 23988 23147
LP 1 F115 115 1NO 30 55 59 59 80 23911 23118 23914 23917 23989 23148
LP 1 F150 150 1NO 40 75 80 80 100 23912 23158 23915 23918 23990 23149
LP 1 F225 225 1NO 63 110 110 110 129 23913 23228 23916 23919 23994 23201
Contactors
54
www.elmarkgroup.eu
AC contactor for switching on of capacitors CJ19-43
The AC contactors CJ19-43 are specially designed electrical devices for commutation of three phase capacitors used for
power correction. They are alternating current contactor LT1 Dxx with mounted a group for peak current lowering from the
transitional process of the capacitor’s switching on/off. This group is a combination of current limiting resistors, switched
on in the beginning of the transitional process (switching on/off of the capacitor group).
The contactors are suitable for capacitors with rate up to 50 kVAr.
Functions:
- switching on/off of capacitors for reactive power compensation
- making of systems for compensation of the energy reactive component
- lowering of the peak transitional currents at switching on/off of the capacitor
- reliable separation of power contacts
Documents corresponding to - secured part of the contactor against consumer contact
the product: Technical data:
Standard * Operation class: AC 6
EN60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60Hz
* Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC
C5 The products are in accordance * insulation voltage: 690V
with the directives of EC “Low * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
73/23 EEC” and * Number of the contacts: 3 NO power contacts +1NO operative
“Electromagnetic Compatibility * Joining terminal: screw terminal
Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 * Connecting:
EEC”. - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
- rigid conductors
* Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
Dimensions
Type A B C D
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
CJ19-32 DPK 56 74 130 150
CJ19-40 DPK 75 127 180 150
CJ19-65 DPK 85 127 200 157
CJ19-95 DPK 85 127 200 157
Type Rated current Rated capacity Coil Catalogue Package / Box
number (A) of the consumer (kVAr) voltage number ( pcs )
400/415V 690V (V)
CJ19-32 DPK 32 8 12.5 230 23932 1/20

CJ19-32 DPK 32 8 12.5 400 23910 1/20
CJ19-40 DPK 40 12.5 15 230 23900 1/16
CJ19-40 DPK 40 12.5 15 400 23940 1/16
CJ19-65 DPK 65 25 30 230 23961 1/16
CJ19-65 DPK 65 25 30 400 23965 1/16
CJ19-95 DPK 95 30 36 230 23909 1/16
CJ19-95 DPK 95 30 36 400 23995 1/16
CJ19-115 DPK 115 35 40 230 23991 1/4
CJ19-150 DPK 150 40 50 230 23992 1/4
CJ19-170 DPK 170 50 60 230 23993 1/4
Contactors
55
Reverse contactors LT 4-Dxx www.elmarkgroup.eu
LT 4-Dxx series contactors are specially designed electromagnetic devices for commutation of three phase induction
motor with reversing controlling scheme. They represent two alternating current contactors LT 4-Dxx series factory
mechanically joined together. The mechanical joining also provides locking of the contactors against simultaneous
switching on. The contactor is used for reverse control of induction motors with shortly joined rotor.
The contactors from the series are offered for consumers up to 95A.
Functions:
- switching on of electrical motors in one direction of rotation and reversing of the rotation direction at outside command
- reliable switching on or separation of power contacts
- secured part of the contactors against consumer contact
- impossibility for simultaneous switching on of the two contactors from the group due to mechanical locking
the product:
Technical data:
Standard
EN60947-1, EN 60947-4-1
* Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz
* Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC C6
The products are in accordance
* insulation voltage: 690V
* Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc
73/23 EEC” and
* Number of plugs: 3 NO power contacts +1NO operative (for contactors over 40A there is also additional 1NC
contact)
Directives (EMC)
* Joining terminal: screw terminal
no. 89/336 EEC”.
* Connecting:
- rigid conductors
Note: The contactors are offered without fabric cabling
* Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1 000 000
* Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10 000 000
* Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
Dimensions
Type A B C
number (mm) (mm) (mm)
LT 4 - D1810 90 77 83
LT 4 - D2510 90 85 98
LT 4 - D3210 90 91 105
LT 4 - D4011 165 91 142
LT 4 - D6511 182 127 142
LT 4 - D9511 182 127 158
Type Rated current Rated capacity of the consumer Catalogue number Box / Carton
number (A) (kW) (pcs)
230V 400V 415V 440V 690V
LT 4 D1810 18 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 23301 1 / 20
LT 4 D2510 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 23302 1 / 20
LT 4 D3210 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 23303 1 / 20
LT 4 D4011 40 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 30 23304 1/ 8
LT 4 D6511 65 18.5 30 30 30 37 23305 1/8
LT 4 D9511 95 25 45 45 45 45 23306 1/6
Contactors
56
Auxiliary contact blocks
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Auxiliary contacts
At necessity the element provide auxiliary number of contacts. They are specially designed for mounting on the movable part
of the magnetic core of the contactors LT 1K/D series.
Functions:
- extending the number of the operative contactors up to 4 in different
Combinations
- switches on simultaneously with the other contact system of the contactor
Technical data:
Documents corresponding to * Connecting:
the product: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal
Standard EN 60 947-4-1 - rigid conductors
* Mounting:
The products are in accordance - on the movable cover of the contactor through pinching
C7 - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable
73/23 EEC” and (self-extinguishing material)
Directives (EMC)
no. 89/336 EEC”. Type LT01-DN02 LT01-DN11 LT01-DN20 LT01-DN22 LT01-DN40 LT01-DN04 LT01-KN11 LA1-KN22
Number of
contacts 2NC NO+NC 2NO 2NO+2NC 4NO 4NC NO+NC 2NO+2NC
Catalogue
number 23002 23011 23020 23022 23040 23004 23001 23003
Auxiliary contacts LT03-DN11

Providing on necessity additional number of plug points and are mounted sideward to the movable part of the magnetic
cores of contactors of the series LT1 D. Variants with two additional plug points NO and NC are offered.
Functions:
- expanding the number of the operational plug points
- switching on simultaneously with the rest of the contact system
of the contactor
* Environment operational regime: АС 3
* Insulation voltage: 690V
* Double connector: screw connector
Catalogue №23311 * Connection:
- flexible conductors with or without cable end
- solid conductors
* Mounting method:
- mounting position – sideward to the contactor
* Plastic: resistant to UV and non-burning (self-extinguishing material)
Time delay contact block LT02-Dxx

LT02-Dxx is designed to set time intervals from 0.1 to 180s in different control schemes. It is used most frequently in
combination with contactors from LT1-Dxx series to form “star/delta” starters for electrical motor control, as it provides
the necessary time for motor winding.
Type LТ02-DT0 LТ02-DT2 LТ02-DT4
Number of
contacts N0+NC N0+NC N0+NC
Time
delay
0.1~3s 0.1~30s 10~180s
Catalogue
23901 23902 23903
number
Contactors
57
Module contactors K series www.elmarkgroup.eu
Modular contactors K series are used for commutation of mono-phase and three-phase low power electrical consumers.
They provide connection between the consumers in small overall dimensions, silent work, mounting only at DIN-rails.
Functions:
- switching on of consumers
- reliable switching on or separation of power contacts
Technical data:
K20 * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz
* Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC
the product:
Standard EN 60669-2-3
* Connecting:
- rigid conductors
C8
73/23 EEC” and
* Mounting:
- on DIN-rail or
Directives (EMC)
- mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5°
no. 89/336 EEC”.
K40
27.5
Type In Coil voltage Contacts Catalogue

(V) number
K20 20A 230V 2NO 23008

À1 1 3 À1 1 3 À1 1 3 À1 1 3 5 7 K20 20A 230V NO+NC 23007
K20 20A 230V 2NC 23009
K40 40A 230V 2NO+2NC 23422
À2 2 4 À2 2 4 À2 2 4 À2 2 4 6 8 K40 40A 230V 4NO 23409
2NO NO+NC 2NC 4NO
Capacity coefficient compensation
58
Complex compensating devices
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Complex compensating devices
The use of electrical energy in industry is invariably connected with its transformation. The development of semi-
conductor elements and the broader coming of semi-conductor transformers, frequency control, welding machines and
electrical arc furnaces in industrial projects have a negative impact over the electrical power quality in the electro
distributing systems. Induction machines need reactive energy to create electromagnetic field. The reactive component of
current is taken from the electro distributing systems but it leads to additional losses in the power supply system and
makes shorter the exploitation term of electrical devices. This leads to curving of the sinusoid form of current and voltage
and interferences with harmonic character. Compensating the reactive power means to fill up the system in such a way
that the needed reactive power to be created from the compensating device instead of being taken from the electro
transportation system. This leads to killing the voltage fall and cable losses and increasing the outlet power of the power
transporters and cutting down the bills for overconsumption of reactive energy paid by consumers to the electricity supply
company. In practice compensating the reactive energy and high harmonics through LC filters combined in compensating
installations has the broadest spreading.
There are several types of compensation according to their location:

* individual compensation – when to every single motor or consumer is mounted a compensating system. It is applied
to powerful motors and transformers with fixed capacity.
D1 * installation compensation – when the consumers from the whole section (workshop) are grouped and compensation
is accomplished for the whole section.
* overall compensation – accomplished at full compensation in the inlet of the installation.
According to the type of the compensating devices compensation can be:
* passive – when the system supplies constant reactive power. In this case the system does not react to changes in
the size and nature of the harmonic components and also to the per cent increase of the reactive energy in time.
* active – broader spread. The system controls the form of the consumed current and generates different capacity
depending on the load changes.
When designing the electro distributing system of industrial projects the following tasks are taken into consideration:
* defining the factor of non-sinusoid of the consumers and the voltage harmonic components
* defining the additional loading of the capacitor batteries from the harmonic components and calculating the filtering
elements if needed
The calculation of the compensating device capacity is done by reading the reactive energy of the system and the
working time of the system. Compensating devices represent a device of one or several metal boxes with common rail
system, automatic regulator for cosφ control RPSF-xx series, different number of capacitor batteries (according to the
capacity of the device) with different capacity HY 111 series, contactors for capacitor batteries control CJ 19-43 series,
protective elements, etc.
The broadest spreading of compensation has acquired the compensation of harmonics and reactive energy with
capacitors for high voltage. Capacitors HY 111 series are voltage remeasured and are able to endure overload from
harmonic components up to 7% from the basic harmonics. They are used in systems with high harmonics foul up to 25%.
The high harmonics composition is defined after measuring the influence rate of each separate harmonics compared to
the first one. In Bulgaria mostly spread are 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13 harmonics. The capacitors are remeasured for voltage 415V
and are normally mounted right in the compensation systems.
When the high harmonics are over 25% the system is taken to be foul and in this case except using capacitors, filters
for leveling the harmonics are to be used as well. These filters are calculated on the basis of the corresponding voltage
harmonics and differ for the different harmonics. They are calculated using complex mathematical programme which
reads the foul rate, the significance per cent of the voltage harmonic component, etc.
59
Capacitor batteries and cosφ regulator
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Capacitor batteries for reactive energy compensation
Capacitor batteries HY 111 series are specially designed three phase dry capacitors for compensation of reactive energy
and correction of the capacity factor. It represents an aluminum cylindrical body in which a metal polypropylene folio is
mounted which does not require special impregnation. The permittivity characteristics are acquired through filling with a
special mixture on a vegetable base (resins). The capacitor battery is constructed in such a way that at failure (overload
from voltage, current or temperature) breaks the connection to the upper cover where are the connections to the power
supply. This is done by a specially constructed valve for overpressure mounted right above the capacitor element.
The breaking of the inner couplings provides protection to the staff and environment from damage due to capacitor
element failure. There is a three phase capacitor in the cylindrical body with built in resistor for rarefying the capacitors.
The capacitor battery can be used both for passive and active compensation.
Technical data:
the product:
Standard * Rated operating voltage: 415V; 50Hz
EN 60831-1 * insulation voltage: 690V
EN 60831-2 * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute
* Capacity: from 8 to 30 kVAr at 415V
* Tolerance: ±5%
* Operating temperature: -40 - +55C ْ
* Capacity losses: 0.5W/kVAr
D2
* Built in discharging resistance
* Admissible current overload: twice as much the peak current
* Discharge time: <50V per minute
* Altitude: 2000m
Mounting:
* With bolt M12 to a flat horizontal base
Type of the battery Operating voltage Battery capacity Catalogue number Type of the battery Operating voltage Battery capacity Catalogue number
(V) (kVAr) (V) (kVAr)
HY 111A8 440 8 49008 HY 111B12* 690 12.5 49031

HY 111A12 440 12.5 49012 HY 111B25* 690 25 49032
HY 111A15 440 15 49015
HY 111A20 440 20 49020
HY 111A30 440 30 49030
Note: *Suitable for wind generators
Controller for automatic regulation of the capacity factor (cosφ regulator)
The automatic regulators of the capacity factor RPCF-xx series are devices for monitoring of low voltage systems and
control of switching on of capacitor batteries for the capacity factor compensation. There is possibility for adjustment of
the system parameters and control. Manufactured by the latest CMOS technology, they are distinguished with high
degree of data security, easy programming and secure control of the outlets. There is possibility for indication and setting
the parameters of the power supply system as: capacity coefficient, display of the system parameters such as voltage,
current and capacity, losses, protection against overload, overload indication or lack of voltage, etc.
The change of parameters is performed through a combination of buttons on the front panel. There is light diode to
indicate which parameter is being displayed on the screen and which outlets are in operation. The display is four digital.
There is possibility for choice of the working conditions: manual or automatic.
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V
Type HY-RPCF12 HY-RPCF16 * Operating frequency: 45 – 65Hz
* Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute
Number of 12 16
steps * Measurement range: from 0 to 9999kVAr
* Measurement accurateness:
Catalogue - voltage: ±1.0%
number 49120 49160 - current: ±1.0%
- capacity coefficient: ±1.0%
- reactive energy: ±2.0%
* Operating temperature: -10-+55°C
* Humidity: 30 – 60%
* Display: 4 digital
* Responsiveness: 20mA
* Outlet: 7A
* Number of outlets: 12 and 16
Mounting:
* Оn the front panel of the box through cutting an opening
60
Filters for harmonics and metal boxes
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Filters for harmonics
In the cases when the standard given in EN 50160 is not kept it is necessary to use a filtering system made of a capacitor
battery and connected to it inductivity in series. The parameters of the filtering element are defined according to the rate
of the given harmonics and are different for each one. The theoretical parameters of the filtering inductivity for the given
capacitor batteries for voltage 415V are presented in table 1.
Table 1
Harmonics Battery Battery Battery Battery Battery Battery
inductivity (H) 8kVAr 12kVAr 15 kVAr 20kVAr 25kVAr 30kVAr
L5 2.741x10-3 1.754x10-3 1.462x10-3 1.096x10-3 8.771x10-4 7.309x10-4

L7 1.398x10-3 8.95x10-4 7.459x10-4 5.594x10-4 4.475x10-4 3.729x10-4
-4 -4 -4 -4 -4
L9 8.42x10 5.414x10 4.512x10 3.384x10 2.707x10 2.256x10-4
-4 -4 -4 -4 -4
L11 5.663x10 3.625x10 3.02x10 2.265x10 1.812x10 1.51x10-4
-4 -4 -4 -4 -4
L13 4.055x10 2.595x10 2.163x10 1.622x10 1.298x10 1.081x10-4
Note: At order we define the practical parameters of the filtering elements for each capacitor system in order to improve the capacity
D3 factor and minimize the consumed active and reactive energy in harmonics one.
On the basis of its production experience ELMARK offers filters for harmonics of seventh harmonic, which are
presented in table 2
Inductivity for Battery Battery Battery Battery Battery Battery

seven harmonic 8kVAr 12kVAr 15 kVAr 20kVAr 25kVAr 30kVAr
(H)
Catalogue number 49708 49712 49715 49720 49725 49730
Metal boards for making of systems for capacity factor correction
Metal boards for capacitor batteries mounting made of specially processed sheet iron with protective surface. A fan is
mounted to provide temperature conditions. There is possibility a breaker to be mounted on the door. The device is
protected against indirect contact to the current leading elements. It is mounted directly on the walls or floor, as at
mounting on a wall it is fixed with screws to the surface. It necessary to provide enough distance for cooling of the board.
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: 400V; 50Hz
* Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kVm
* Operating temperature: -5-+55C ْ
* Maximum overloading current: 1.3xIn
the product:
Standard * Surface: zinc passivation
EN 60439-1 * Colour: RAL 7032
EN 60439-2 * Altitude: up to 2500m
Mounting:
* on vertical or horizontal surfaces
Dimensions
Type L H W Catalogue number

(mm) (mm) (mm)
CXF550/356/225 550 356 225 49225

CXF1140/450/450 1140 450 450 49450
CXF1730/600/600 1730 600 600 49600
Note: The boards are supplied with a cooling fan

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors
61
Thermal relays
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Thermal relays
The thermal relays LT 2- K/Exx series are devices designed for protection of induction motors from overload or overheat.
They are mounted to contactors LT 1 K/Dxx series and an operating circuit for motor control is passed through their NC
contacts. The operation of these devices is based on the curving of bimetal plates mounted in the thermal relay caused
by the current passing through them. When the current to the consumer gets higher due to failure, the thermal current
gets higher which leads to additional curving of the bimetal plates and at getting above the limit value for the plate it
pushes the breaking mechanism and breaks the operating circuit.
The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees
maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.
Functions:
- switching off alternating current consumers at current overload
- making of control systems for consumers
Documents corresponding to - used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors
the product: - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
Standard Technical data:
EN 60947-1 * Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz
EN 60947-4-1 * Rated operating current range: up to 690V AC
The products are in accordance * insulation voltage: >690V
with the directives of EC “Low * Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Joining terminal: screw terminal
73/23 EEC” and * Connecting:
“Electromagnetic Compatibility - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer
Directives (EMC) - to the contactor through the relay terminals
no. 89/336 EEC”. - the connecting terminals with the consumer can be adjusted according to the type of the contactor E1
* Indication for protection activating
* Possibility for choice of the protection restoring (through the blue button)
* Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating
* Possibility for operation at higher frequency
* Mounting:
- mounting to the contactor: to the terminals of the contactor as it is additionally clamped to its frame through a pin
Note: To protect the consumer from short circuit, before the combination contactor- thermal relay, a suitably measured
breaker or safety device should be mounted.
hour
2h
Connecting scheme
1h
40 mm LT 2 Exx
control
20 mm buttons
10 mm
4 mm
2 mm
1 mm
40 s
20 s
10 s
4s
2s
1s
0.8 s
0.8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20
x value (Ir)
Dimensions
Type a b c m x y v z
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
LT 2 - Kxx 81 50 0 98 47 92 44 17
LT 2 - E13xx 86 55 10.7 108 47 92 44 17
LT 2 - E23xx 86 55 9 109 47 92 44 17
LT 2 - E33xx 115 76 9.5 124 54 109 70 30
62
Thermal relays
www.elmarkgroup.eu
For contactor Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Catalogue Package / Box
LT1-K06 type (A) adjustment range number ( pcs )
220V 380V 660V
230V 400V 690V
LT2-K0301 - - - 0.16 0.10 - 0.16 13401 1 / 100

LT2-K0302 - - - 0.25 0.16 - 0.25 13402 1 / 100
LT2-K0303 - - - 0.40 0.25 - 0.40 13403 1 / 100
LT2-K0304 - - 0.37 0.63 0.40 - 0.63 13404 1 / 100
LT2-K0305 - - 0.55 1 0.63 - 1.0 13405 1 / 100
LT2-K0306 - 0.37 1.1 1.6 1.0 - 1.6 13406 1 / 100
LT2-K0307 0.37 0.75 1.5 2.5 1.6 - 2.5 13407 1 / 100
LT2-K0308 0.75 1.5 3 4 2.5 - 4 13408 1 / 100
LT2-K0310 1.1 2.2 4 6 4-6 13410 1 / 100
LT2-K0312 1.1 2.2 4 8 5.5 - 8 13411 1 / 100
LT2-K0314 2.2 4 7.5 10 7 - 10 13412 1 / 100
LT2-K0316 3.7 5.5 11 13 9 - 13 13413 1 / 100
LT2-K0321 4 7.5 15 18 12 - 18 13414 1 / 100
LT2-K0322 5.5 7.5 15 25 17 - 25 13415 1 / 100
For contactors
Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Catalogue Package / Box
from LT1-D09 to
(A) adjustment range number ( pcs )
LT1-D25 type 220V 380V 660V
230V 400V 690V
LT2-E1301 - - - 0.16 0.10 - 0.16 13001 1 / 100
- 0.25
E1 LT2-E1302 - - 0.16 - 0.25 13002 1 / 100
LT2-E1303 - - - 0.40 0.25 - 0.40 13003 1 / 100
LT2-E1304 - - 0.37 0.63 0.40 - 0.63 13004 1 / 100
LT2-E1305 - - 0.55 1.0 0.63 - 1.0 13005 1 / 100
LT2-E1306 - 0.37 1.1 1.6 1.0 - 1.6 13006 1 / 100
LT2-E1307 0.37 0.75 1.5 2.5 1.6 - 2.5 13007 1 / 100
LT2-E1308 0.75 1.5 3 4.0 2.5 - 4.0 13008 1 / 100
LT2-E1310 1.1 2.2 4 6.0 4.0 - 6.0 13010 1 / 100
LT2-E1312 2 3.7 5.5 8.0 5.5 - 8.0 13012 1 / 100
LT2-E1314 2.2 4 7.5 10.0 7.0 - 10.0 13014 1 / 100
LT2-E1316 3.7 5.5 11 13.0 9.0 - 13.0 13016 1 / 100
LT2-E1321 4 7.5 15 18.0 12.0 - 18.0 13021 1 / 100
LT2-E1322 5.5 9 18.5 25.0 17.0 - 25.0 13022 1 / 100
LT2-E1353 11 11 18.5 33.0 23.0 - 32.0 13053 1 / 100
For contactor Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Catalogue Package / Box
LT1-D32 type 380V 660V (A) adjustment range number ( pcs )
400V 440V 690V
LT2-E2353 11 11 18.5 32 23.0 - 32.0 13253 1 / 100

LT2-E2355 15 15 22 36 28.0 - 36.0 13255 1 / 100
For contactors Motor capacity (kW) Rated current Protection Catalogue Package / Box
from LT1-D40 to (A) adjustment range number ( pcs )
380V 660V
LT1-D95 type
400V 440V 690V
LT2-E3355 18.5 18.5 30 40 30.0 - 40.0 13355 1 / 50

LT2-E3357 22 22 30 50 37.0 - 50.0 13357 1 / 50
LT2-E3359 30 30 37 65 48.0 - 65.0 13359 1 / 50
LT2-E3363 45 45 55 80 63.0 - 80.0 13363 1 / 50
LT2-E3365 55 55 75 93 80.0 - 93.0 13365 1 / 50
63
Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 www.elmarkgroup.eu
The thermomagnetic automatic breakers TM 2-Exx series are devices designed for control and protection of induction
motors from overload, overheat or short circuit. The overload motor protection is carried out by the built in the breaker
thermal elements, and the short circuit protection is carried out by the magnetic elements. These magnetic elements
allow the adjustment of the current leakage which is 13 times the maximum current of the thermal protection. The
overload protection elements include automatic compensation for the ambient temperature changes. In combination with
under voltage release the thermomagnetic breaker TM 2-Exx also provides protection of the motors from fall out of a
phase from the power supply. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature
conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of
exploitation.
Functions:
- switching off alternating current consumers at current overload
- switching off the electrical circuit to the consumer at inlet short circuit
- protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage (if there is under voltage release)
- used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors
I 1 - possibility for change/choice of the protection current (according to the operating current of the motor)
O - automatic compensation of the ambient temperature
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz
2 * Rated operating current range: from 0.1 to 80A according to the type in table 1
4 * Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V
* Connecting: E2
- flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer
- to the contactor through the relay terminals
- the connecting terminals with the consumer can be adjusted according to the type of the contactor
* Indication for protection activating
* Switching on of the breaker manually with button “I” and switching off with button “O” manually or automatically at
failure or after activating of the protection
* Possibility for independent operation or as an element of an automation system
* Mounting:
- mounting to DIN-rail
Dimensions Auxiliary
contact UVR
64
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2
E2
Type Rated capacity of three-phase motor Magnetic segment Thermal protection Thermal current Catalogue Package / Box
number in AC-3 category current (A) adjustment range Ithe TM2-E number ( pcs )
220V 400V
230V 415V 440V 500V 690V А А
TM2-E01 - - - - - 1.5 0.1 - 0.16 0.16 48001 1 / 50

TM2-E02 - 0.06 0.06 - - 2.4 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 48002 1 / 50
TM2-E03 0.06 0.09 0.09 - - 5 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 48003 1 / 50
TM2-E04 - 0.12 0.18 - 0.37 8 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 48004 1 / 50
TM2-E05 0.09 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.55 13 0.63 - 1 1 48005 1 / 50
TM2-E06 0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 22.5 1 - 1.6 1.6 48006 1 / 50
TM2-E07 0.37 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.5 33.5 1.6 - 2.5 2.5 48007 1 / 50
TM2-E08 0.55 1.1 1.5 1.5 2.2 51 2.5 - 4 4 48008 1 / 50
TM2-E10 1.1 2.2 2.2 3 4 78 4 - 6.3 6.3 48010 1 / 50
TM2-E14 1.5 3 4 4 5.5 138 6 - 10 9 48014 1 / 50
TM2-E16 2.2 5.5 5.5 7.5 9 170 9 - 14 13 48016 1 / 50
TM2-E20 4 7.5 7.5 9 15 223 13 - 18 17 48020 1 / 50
TM2-E21 5.5 9 11 11 18.5 327 17 - 23 21 48021 1 / 50
TM2-E22 5.5 11 11 15 22 327 20 - 25 23 48022 1 / 50
TM2-E32 7.5 15 15 18.5 22 416 24 - 32 24 48032 1 / 50
TM3-E40 11 18.5 22 25 33 480 25 - 40 32 48040 1 / 15
TM3-E63 15 30 33 40 55 550 40 - 63 50 48063 1 / 15
TM3-E80 22 40 45 55 63 665.5 56 - 80 64 48080 1 / 15
65
Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 www.elmarkgroup.eu
For increasing the effectiveness of the thermomagnetic breakers TM 2-Exx operation, they can be supplied with
auxiliary devices, designed for widening the practice range and improving the technical characteristics of the breakers
Voltage release (VR) for TM 2

The release is designed to switch off the thermomagnetic breaker when the controlling voltage falls under breaking level
0.55 to 0.7 UN and does not allow switching on of the breaker unless the voltage is over 0.85 Un.
Functions:
- switching off the breaker at power supply voltage fall under 0.55 – 0.7 Un
- does not allow switching on of the breaker when the power supply voltage is under 0.85 Un
- prevents unwarranted secondary start of the breaker at falling off and restoring of the power supply voltage
- protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage
- used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors
the product:
Mounting:
Standard EN 60947-1
* At the side of the breaker through special openings
EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1
73/23 EEC” and
“Electromagnetic Compatibility Type Voltage (V) Catalogue number
Directives (EMC) ТМ2 АU225 230 48099
no. 89/336 EEC”. ТМ3 АU385 400 48098
E3
Watertight box for TM 2-E

Specially designed plastic box with silicon screen for increasing the IP code from dust and moisture to
IP 65
* Mounting:
- mounted to horizontal surfaces (walls) with bolts
- the breaker TM2 Exx is fixed inside of it on rail
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable
Catalogue number 8083
the product:
Standard EN 60529
Auxiliary contact block TM2 AE11

It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC contact. It changes
the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted.
* Mounting:
- laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx
- up to 5 auxiliary contact blocks can be mounted
* Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable 21 22
13 14
Catalogue number 48912 * Altitude: up to 2000m
Auxiliary contact block TM2 AN11

It is designed to switch on operational circuits or signalization. It is designed with one NO and one NC contact. It
changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted.
* Mounting:
- laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx
- more than 5 auxiliary contact blocks can be mounted
Type Catalogue number
ТМ2 АN11 48911

ТМ3 АN11 48913
66
www.elmarkgroup.eu Starters for direct start
The electromagnetic starters LT 5 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and protection of
induction motors or other electrical consumers. They are a combination of contactors LT 1 Dxx series and thermal
protection LT 2 Exx fabric cabled. The starters are offered on the market in metal or plastic boxes with the corresponding
IP code from dust and moisture. At mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through
breakers or disconnectors.
If necessary, at client’s order the fabric mounted thermal protection in the pneumatic starter can be substituted. The
choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum
constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.
Functions:
Documents corresponding to - switching on/off alternating current consumers
the product: - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage
Standard EN 60947-1; - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection
EN 60947-4-1 - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
The products are in accordance Technical data:
with the directives of EC “Low * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 230/400V AC; 50/60 Hz
voltage directives (LVD) no. Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives.
73/23 EEC” and
* Rated operating voltage: 690V
Directives (EMC) * Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC
no. 89/336 EEC”. * insulation voltage: 690V
E4 * Joining terminal: screw terminal
* Little power consumption and small dimensions
* Connecting:
- flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the
motor power
- two by two inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables
* IP code: IP 44
* Mounting:
- mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws
* Metal corpus: corrosion-proof coating
1/L1
3/L3
2/L2
1/L1
13
I KM 1=LT1- Dxx
KM 1
14
95
LT2-Exx O LT2-Exx
96
A2
W
U
V
KM 1
A1
M L2/N
67
Starters for direct start www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type Rated capacity of motors Rated currentThermal relay Coil voltage Catalogue Package
number 50/60Hz AC-3 category (A) adjustment (V) number / Box
140
120
range
220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V
166 230 43091 1 / 16

LT5 D093 2.2 4 4 9 7 .. 10A
2 x PE13
2 x PE13 400 43092 1 / 16
230 43121 1 / 16
LT5 D123 3 5.5 5.5 12 9 .. 13A
88
400 43122 1 / 16
2x Æ
LT5 D185 4 7.5 9 18 12 .. 18A 230 43181 1 / 16
5.5
150
400 43182 1 / 16
Remark : Under request the thermal relay will be replaced
E4
142
135
range
220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V
185
230 43251 1 / 16
LT5 D255 5.5 11 11 25 17 .. 25A
2 x PE16 16 400 43252 1 / 16
43321 1 / 16
2xÆ
7.5 15 230
LT5 D325 15 32 23 .. 32A
101
5.5
400 43322 1 / 16
PE13
165
161
150
220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V range
312 230 43401 43401

2 x PE29 LT5 D405 11 18.5 22 40 30 .. 40A
400 43402 43402
230 43651 43651
LT5 D655 18.5 30 37 65 48 .. 65A
4x Æ
105
400 43652 43652

181
7.7
230 43951 43951

PE13 195 LT5 D955 25 45 45 95 80 .. 93A
400 43952 43952

68
“Star/delta” starter
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The electromagnetic starters LT 3 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and protection of
induction motors coiled and operating according to a starter scheme “star/delta”. They are a combination of three
contactors LT 1 Dxx series, time relay and a set of buttons “start” and “stop” fabric cabled. They provide the easy motor
unwinding giving possibility for setting the time for unwinding in “star” as the time for switching between “star” and “delta”
is fixed to 0.5 seconds.
The starters are offered on the market in two types:
- closed type – metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP 54) as at mounting there
should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors
- open type – for mounting in distribution boxes as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from
short circuit through breakers or disconnectors
The starters are offered on the market without mounted thermal protection which is purchased separately according to
the motor capacity. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and
Documents corresponding to guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.
the product: If necessary, at client’s order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed.
EN 60947-4-1 - switching on/off alternating current three phase motors operating according to a scheme “star - delta”
The products are in accordance - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage
with the directives of EC “Low - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection
voltage directives (LVD) no. - indication of the operating condition through a valve indicator
73/23 EEC” and - possibility for mounting of additional contacts (for the open type)
“Electromagnetic Compatibility - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
Directives (EMC) Technical data:
no. 89/336 EEC”. * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC; 50/60 Hz
E5 Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives.
* Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93A AC
* insulation voltage: >690V
* Connecting:
- flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to
the motor power
- three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables
* Mounting:
* The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint
95
R S T
96
21 REMOTE
CONTROL
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
22
K2 K3 K1
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 13 12
K2
14 14
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1 12
1 3 5 K1
14
2 4 6 55 67
LT2-Exx K2 K2
U2 V2 W2 56 68
U2 V2 W2
21 21
K3 K1
22 22
Kx = LT3-Dxx
K1 K2 K3
69
“Star/delta” starter www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type designation Overall dimensions

(without a box) (mm)
height width depth
LТ3-D25А 135 170 160
LТ3-D32А 135 170 160
LТ3-D40А 150 285 190
LТ3-D65А 150 285 190
LТ3-D95А 150 310 190
Type designation Rated capacity Rated current Coil voltage Catalogue number
(without a box) kW (V AC)
220V 380V
230V 400V 415V 440V
LТ3-D25А 11 15 15 15 25А 400 43253

LТ3-D32А 15 18.5 18.5 18.5 32А 400 43323
LТ3-D40А 18.5 22 22 22 40А 400 43403
LТ3-D65А 30 55 55 55 65А 400 43653
95А E5
LТ3-D95А 37 75 75 75 400 43953
Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor.
The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are chosen starters which
correspond to the current rating of the motor
Type designation Overall dimensions

(with a box) (mm)
height width depth
LT 3 -B-D25A 370 240 160

LT 3 -B-D32A 370 240 160
LT 3 -B-D40A 470 265 160
LT 3 -B-D65A 470 265 160
LT 3 -B-D95A 470 265 160
(with a box) kW (V AC)
220V 380V
230V 400V 415V 440V
LT 3 - B - D25A 11 15 15 15 25А 400 43254

LT 3 - B - D32A 15 18.5 18.5 18.5 32А 400 43255
LT 3 - B - D40A 18.5 22 22 22 40А 400 43256
LT 3 - B - D65A 30 55 55 55 65А 400 43257
LT 3 - B - D95A 37 75 75 75 95А 400 43258
Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor.
The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are chosen starters which
correspond to the current rating of the motor
70
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Reverse starters
The electromagnetic starters LT4 Dxx series are devices used for direct start, reverse start and protection of induction
motors with short connected rotor. They are a combination of two contactors LT1 Dxx series supplied with two buttons
“start” and one “stop” fabric cabled. They provide the unwinding of the motor in one of the directions with possibility for
pushing the button “stop” and giving command from the other “start” for changing the motor winding direction. The two
contactors are mechanically blocked and do not allow simultaneous start in both winding directions.
The starters are offered – closed type in metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP54)
as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors.
The starters are offered with mounted thermal protection which can be substituted according to the motor power. The
choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum
constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.
Documents corresponding to If necessary, at order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed.
the product:
EN 60947-4-1 - switching on alternating current three phase motors in one winding direction, switching off and change of the winding
The products are in accordance direction at giving a signal
with the directives of EC “Low - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage
voltage directives (LVD) no. - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection
73/23 EEC” and - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics
“Electromagnetic Compatibility Technical data:
Directives (EMC) * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC; 50/60 Hz
E6 no. 89/336 EEC”. Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives.
* Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC
* Connecting:
- flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the
motor power
- three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables
* IP code: IP 44
* Mounting:
* The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint
71
Reverse starters www.elmarkgroup.eu
(with a box) kW (V AC)
220V 380V
230V 400V 415V 440V
LT 4 - B - D25A 11 15 15 15 25А 400 43001

LT 4 - B - D32A 15 18.5 18.5 18.5 32А 400 43002
LT 4 - B - D40A 18.5 22 22 22 40А 400 43003
LT 4 - B - D65A 30 55 55 55 65А 400 43004
LT 4 - B - D95A 37 75 75 75 95А 400 43005
Type designation Overall dimensions (mm)

(with a box)
height width depth
LT 4 -B-D25A 370 240 160

LT 4 -B-D32A 370 240 160
LT 4 -B-D40A 470 265 160 E6
LT 4 -B-D65A 470 265 160
LT 4 -B-D95A 470 265 160
scheme “Reverse”
L1 L2 L3
K 2-1
4A
95NC 97NO
R F1
96 98
I 0 II
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
14 N0 14 N0 K1 K2
K1 K2 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3 2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
13 13
S1 S2
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
F1
A2 A2
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
K1 K2
A1 A1
K 2-5 U1 V1 W1
72
www.elmarkgroup.eu ELM 1000 frequency inverters
for conveyor systems control
Frequency inverters are designed to control three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. They provide for the
implementation of some control laws, thus becoming an indispensable part of the control systems for conveyors and
packaging machines. The ELM 1000 inverter provides optimized V/f control and output load can reach up to 150% within
60 seconds. It features easy definition of curves and easy parameters setting of inverter through the use of control panel
buttons.
Functions:
- rotation speed increase – automatic and manual
- sliding compensation: from 0 to 20%
- adjustment of the V/F control curve – linear or quadratic
- energy saving through automatic optimization of the V/F curve
- omission of resonance frequencies
Documents corresponding to - JOG function
the product: - 'counter' function
- automatic restart option in case of power supply failure
Standard EN60898-1 - seven speed degrees control option
EN 60947-2 - control choice from the control panel; external or COM terminal
The products are in accordance - frequency control from the control panel, external potentiometer by current or by voltage
with the directives of EC “Low - incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc.
voltage directives (LVD) no. - outgoing discrete control signal 24V
73/23 EEC” and - outgoing analogue control signal 0 – 10V
“Electromagnetic Compatibility - DC brake in static mode
Directives (EMC) - dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor – used in inert electric motor load
E7 no. 89/336 EEC”. - output voltage adjustment option
- activation of output safety functions option
Technical features:
* Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz
* Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10%
* Unbalance of phases: < 3%
* Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
* Output frequency: 0 – 400 Hz
* Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max
* Overload capacity:
- constant: up to 110%
- moment: up to 150%
* Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1%
* Type of connection:
- the connection of the inverter to the power supply should always be done through a circuit breaker of the MCB
or MCCB type
- connection of consumer to power terminals: through conductors suitable for the power
- connection of control circuits: flexible conductor up to 1.5 mm2
Note: It is not recommendable to mount contactors or other commutation devices between the frequency inverter and
the motor, except as described in the product passport.
*Mounting:
- mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts
- mounting position – vertical gradient maximum ± 5°
Note: When more than one inverter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to install them side by side and when
this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided.
* Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material)
* Ambient temperature: -10° to 60° C
* Altitude : up to 2000 m
* Function enhancement option: through the inclusion of additional modules
73
ELM 1000 frequency inverters www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type of sign
М1000- G -0150 T3 С
lid type code: C=metal clips; B=plastic lid
power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase
motor power
inverter type: G=constant momentum
inverter model
Dimensions (mm):
Type of
inverter H W A B D d
ELМ1000-G0007S2B 150 105 139 94 120 Ø4

ELМ1000-G0015S2B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5
ELМ1000-G0007T3B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5
ELМ1000-G0015T3B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5
ELМ1000-G0022T3B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5
ELМ1000-G0037T3B 250 162 233 145 150 Ø6
ELМ1000-G0040T3B 250 162 233 145 150 Ø6
ELМ1000-G0055T3B 300 200 282 182 160 Ø6
ELМ1000-G0075T3B 300 200 282 182 160 Ø6
ELМ1000-G0110T3C 340 225 322 160 220 Ø6
ELМ1000-G0150T3C 380 230 362 186 225 Ø6 E7
Type Input Maximum Maximum Catalogue

voltage output power current output number
(kW) (А)
ELМ1000-G0007S2B 230V 0.75 4.5 423107M

ELМ1000-G0015S2B 230V 1.5 7 423115M
ELМ1000-G0007T3B 400V 0.75 2 423307M
ELМ1000-G0015T3B 400V 1.5 4 423315M
ELМ1000-G0022T3B 400V 2.2 6.5 423322M
ELМ1000-G0037T3B 400V 3.7 8 423337M
ELМ1000-G0040T3B 400V 4.0 9 423340M
ELМ1000-G0055T3B 400V 5.5 12 423355M
ELМ1000-G0075T3B 400V 7.5 17 423375M
ELМ1000-G0110T3C 400V 11 23 423391M
ELМ1000-G0150T3C 400V 15 32 423392M
R
S R U
T S V
T W
E
OP 1
OP 2 TA
OP 3 TB
TC
OP 4
OP 5
FM M
OP 6
V3
OP 7
OP 8
IM A
COM V3
V1
12V
V2 J
OUT
I2
V3 A+ 485 Comunication
B-
74
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Frequency inverters EL – ZVF9 type
for water pumps and fans control
The frequency inverters are designed to control mono phase and three-phase induction motors with short connected
rotor. Different control laws can be applied through them which make them an irreplaceable part of control systems for
conveyers, packing machines, air-conditioning systems, pumps and compressors. It is not advisable to use inverters EL
– ZVF9 type for control of elevators.
Functions:
1. Control functions
- moment increase – automatically and manually
- control curve V/F adjustment – linear or quadratic
- energy saving through automatic optimizing of the V/F curve
- possibility for applying PID control law
Documents corresponding to - omission of frequencies that can lead to resonance
the product: - JOG function
Standard EN 60898-1 - “counter” function
EN 60947-2 - possibility for automatic restart at momentary power supply failure
The products are in accordance - multistage speed control
with the directives of EC “Low 2. Controlling functions
voltage directives (LVD) no. - choice of control from control panel: outside terminal or COM-terminal
73/23 EEC” and - frequency control from control panel, outside potentiometer, current, voltage or terminal 485
“Electromagnetic Compatibility - input signals for direst and reverse winding, multistage control, restart, etc
Directives (EMC) - outlet control discreet signal 24V
no. 89/336 EEC”. - outlet control analogue signal 0-10V
E7 3. Brake functions
- DC-brake
- dynamic stopping with outside brake resistor – used at motor inertia load
mono phase inverter 4. Protective functions
- phase breaking at the inverter inlet
- outlet overcurrent
- outlet overload
- inlet low voltage
- overheat of bearings and windings (if there are sensors in the motor)
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V AC; 50Hz
* Admissible diversion of the rated voltage: ±10%
three-phase inverter * Disbalance of the phases: <3%
* Frequency variation: <5%
* Outlet frequency: 0 – 400Hz
* Outlet voltage: from 0 to Uin max
- transitory: up to 180%
* Modulating system: width impulse modulation (WIM)
* Regulating accuracy of the outlet frequency: 0.01%
* Connecting:
- the connecting of the inverter to the power supply grid must compulsory be through a breaker MCB type or
MCCB
- connecting of the consumer to the power terminals: with conductors suitable for the power
- connecting of the controlling signals: flexible conductor up to 1.5mm
Note: Mounting of contactors or other commutation devices is not recommended between the frequency inverter and the
controlled motor, except for the cases described in the passport of the product
* Mounting:
- mounting to a flat surface with bolts
Note: At mounting more than one inverter in a panel it is recommended that they are mounted next to one another; when
this is impossible suitable conditions for cooling the devices must be provided.
* Possibility for widening of the functions through including additional devices
75
Frequency inverters www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type designation
ZVF9 - G - 0075 T 4
power supply voltage code: 2=230V; 4=400V
phase number: T =three-phase; S = mono phase
motor power
inverter type: P=quadratic moment; G=constant moment
inverter model
Dimensions (mm)
Inverter
type H W A B D d
EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 170 125 159 113 142 Ø5

EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 170 125 159 113 142 Ø5
EL - ZVF 9-G0022S2 170 125 159 113 142 Ø5
EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 170 125 159 113 142 Ø5
EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 170 125 159 113 142 Ø5
EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 170 125 159 113 142 Ø5
EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 250 155 230 143 148 Ø5.5
EL - ZVF 9-G0040T4 250 155 230 143 148 Ø5.5
EL - ZVF 9-G0055T4 336 316 180 140 168 Ø10
EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 336 316 180 140 168 Ø10
EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 380 360 210 160 200 Ø10 E7
EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4 380 360 210 160 200 Ø10
Type Inlet Maximum outlet Maximum outlet Catalogue

voltage capacity (kW) current (A) number
EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 230V 0.75 4 423107

EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 230V 1.5 7 423115
EL - ZVF 9-G0022S2 230V 2.2 10 423122
EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 400V 0.75 2.5 423307
EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 400V 1.5 3.7 423315
EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 400V 2.2 5 423322
EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 400V 3.7 7 423337
EL - ZVF 9-G0040T4 400V 4.0 9.5 423340
EL - ZVF 9-G0055T4 400V 5.5 13 423355
EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 400V 7.5 18 423375
EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 400V 11 24 423391
EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4 400V 15 30 423392
brake resistance throttle
three-phase
power supply
input
electrical motor
potentiometer input
or analog
voltage (DC 0 - 10V)
analog current relay in case of fault

input (DC 4 - 20mA) (AC250/2A)
common connection output 1

direct rolling/stop
reverse/stop output 2
signalization in case of fault
reversion after fault
multi-speed Х1
multi-speed Х2
analog output
multi-speed Х3 DC 0 - 10V or 0 - 1 mA
slipping output +12V
76
www.elmarkgroup.eu ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control
Frequency inverters are designed to control three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. They provide for the
implementation of some control laws, thus becoming an indispensable part of the control systems for conveyors and
packaging machines, pumps, air conditioning systems, etc. The ELM 2000 inverter provides the so-called no-sensor
control, V/f control and impulse control while the output load can reach up to 150% within 60 seconds. It features easy
definition of curves and easy parameters setting of inverter through the use of control panel buttons.
Functions:
- rotation speed increase – automatic and manual
- no-sensor control of the motor
- adjustment of the V/F control curve – linear or quadratic
- energy saving through automatic optimization of the V/F curve
Documents corresponding to - PID control law implementation option
the product: - omission of resonance frequencies
- JOG function
Standard EN60898-1 - 'counter' function
EN 60947-2 - automatic restart option in case of power supply failure
The products are in accordance - fifteen speed degrees control option
with the directives of EC “Low - control choice from the control panel; external or COM terminal
voltage directives (LVD) no. - frequency control from the control panel, external potentiometer by current or by voltage
73/23 EEC” and - auto-calibration in accordance with the switched motor
“Electromagnetic Compatibility - incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc.
Directives (EMC) - outgoing discrete control signal 24V
E7 no. 89/336 EEC”. - outgoing analogue control signal 0 – 10V
- DC brake in static mode
- dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor – used in inert electric motor load
- output voltage adjustment option
- activation of output safety functions option
- electronic motor protection
Technical features:
* Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz
* Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10%
* Unbalance of phases: < 3%
* Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
* Output frequency: 0 – 400 Hz
* Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max
- momentary: up to 150%
* Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1%
* Type of connection:
- the connection of the inverter to the power supply should always be done through a circuit breaker of the MCB
or MCCB type
- connection of consumer to power terminals: through conductors suitable for the power
- connection of control circuits: flexible conductor up to 1.5 mm2
Note: It is not recommendable to mount contactors or other commutation devices between the frequency inverter and
the motor, except as described in the product passport.
* Mounting:
- mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts
Note: When more than one inverter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by side and
when this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided.
* Ambient temperature: -10° to 60° C
* Function enhancement option: through the inclusion of additional modules
77
ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type of sign
М1000- G -0150 T3 С
lid type code: C=metal clips; B=plastic lid
power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase
motor power
inverter type: G=constant momentum
inverter model
Dimensions (mm):
Type of
inverter H W A B D d
ELМ2000-G0007S2B 150 105 139 94 120 Ø4

ELМ2000-G0015S2B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5
ELМ2000-G0007T3B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5
ELМ2000-G0015T3B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5
ELМ2000-G0022T3B 170 125 160 114 140 Ø5
ELМ2000-G0037T3B 250 162 233 145 150 Ø6
ELМ2000-G0040T3B 250 162 233 145 150 Ø6
ELМ2000-G0055T3B 300 200 282 182 160 Ø6
ELМ2000-G0075T3B 300 200 282 182 160 Ø6
ELМ2000-G0110T3C 340 225 322 160 220 Ø6
ELМ2000-G0150T3C 380 230 362 186 225 Ø6 E7
Type Input Maximum Maximum Catalogue

voltage output power current output number
(kW) (А)
ELМ2000-G0007S2B 230V 0.75 4.5 423107B

ELМ2000-G0015S2B 230V 1.5 7 423115B
ELМ2000-G0007T3B 400V 0.75 2 423307B
ELМ2000-G0015T3B 400V 1.5 4 423315B
ELМ2000-G0022T3B 400V 2.2 6.5 423322B
ELМ2000-G0037T3B 400V 3.7 8 423337B
ELМ2000-G0040T3B 400V 4.0 9 423340B
ELМ2000-G0055T3B 400V 5.5 12 423355B
ELМ2000-G0075T3B 400V 7.5 17 423375B
ELМ2000-G0110T3C 400V 11 23 423391B
ELМ2000-G0150T3C 400V 15 32 423392B
R
S R U
T S V
T W
E
OP 1
OP 2 TA
OP 3 TB
TC
...
...
FM M
OP 13
V3
OP 14
OP 15
IM A
COM V3
V1
12V
V2 J
OUT
I2
V3 A+ 485 Comunication
B-
78
Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverters
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Stopping equipment
Brake resistor and brake element – used when stopping time is little or load inertia moment is huge. Inverters up to 15W
are offered with built in brake element but for consumers with high requirements to stopping, there are brake resisters as
an outer module for additional mounting to the brake module.
Functions:
- increasing of the brake moment
- providing a quick stop of the motor
Technical data:
* Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz
* Admissible diversion of the rated voltage: ±10%
* Disbalance of the phases: <3%
* Connecting:
- connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme
* Mounting:
- to a metal surface/frame near the inverter
- necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module
- take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections
Connecting scheme of a brake resister
E8 Connecting scheme of the auxiliary elements
Breaking module Breaking resister

Inverter
Breaker (MCCB)
Contactor
Inverter Inlet Breaking Break resistor admissible Catalogue

type voltage module value for inverter type number
Inlet reactor EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 230V embedded 80W/200Ω 422202

EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 230V embedded 160W/100Ω 422204
EL - ZVF 9-G0022S2 230V embedded 300W/70Ω 422205
Inlet EMC filter EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 400V embedded 80W/750Ω 422206
DC reactor EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 400V embedded 160W/400Ω 422207
Outside breaking
resister EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 400V embedded 300W/250Ω 422208
EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 400V embedded 400W/150Ω 422209
Inverter
Outside breaking EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 400V embedded 800W/75Ω 422212
module EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 400V embedded 1000W/50Ω 422213
EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4 400V embedded 1500W40Ω 422214
Outlet EMC filter
Outlet reactor
Remote control (Extension of the control panel)
It doubles the control panel and serves for control of the inverter from a distance. It represents the inverter panel fabric
cabled with cables with different length – 1.0; 1.5; 2.0; 5 and 10m.
It is ordered as a separate position in addition to the standard equipment of the inverter.
Cable Type Catalogue number
Inverter type
length designation
EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 2m UPM 1 422UPM2

EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 2m UPM 1 422UPM2
EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 2m UPM 1 422UPM2
EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 2m UPG 1 422UPG2
EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4 2m UPG 1 422UPG2
79
Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverter
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Filters for protection of the power supply grid from high harmonics (inlet)
The use of frequency inverters for control of motors with short connected rotor is a precondition for interference from non-sine
character in the power supply grid. It concerns to a great extent the use of powerful inverters. The protection of the power supply grid
from the interference is accomplished through the mounting before the inverter of specially designed throttle elements that smoothen
these non-sine waves generated at the operation of the inverter’s rectifier block.
Functions:
- protection of the power supply grid from high harmonics
Technical data:
* Admissible diversion of the operating voltage: ±10%
* insulation voltage
- phase – earth (2s): 2250V DC
- phase – phase (2s): 1500V DC
* Connecting:
* Mounting:
- mounted between the inverter and the power supply grid
Inverter type Inlet filter type Catalogue number
EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 DL - 6TH1 422001

EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 DL - 10TH3 422002
EL - ZVF 9-G0022S2 DL 15TH1 422003
E8
EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 DL - 5EBK5/40 422004
EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 DL - 5EBK5/40 422005
EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 DL - 10EBK5/40 422006
EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 DL - 16EBK5/40 422007
EL - ZVF 9-G0040T4 DL - 16EBK5/40 422008
EL - ZVF 9-G0055T4 DL - 16EBK5/40 422009
EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 DL - 25EBK5/40 422010
EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 DL - 35EBK5/40 422011
EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4 DL - 50EBK5/50 422012
Filters for protection from electromagnetic interference (EMC) (outlet)

The use of frequency inverters for control of motors with short connected rotor can lead to interference in the magnetic circuits of
appliances mounted near the inverter. This is a specially designed filter element that can be mounted at the outlet of the inverter to
protect the other equipment from the electromagnetic interference from the motor power supply cable. This filter is recommended
when using frequency inverters in systems with special functions, radio dependent systems, medical equipment, etc.
Functions:
- protection of the power supply grid from electromagnetic interference
Technical data:
* Admissible diversion of the operating voltage: ±10%
* Insulation voltage
- phase – earth (2s): 1500V DC
- phase – phase (2s): 1500V DC
* Connecting:
* Mounting:
- mounted between the inverter and the power supply grid
Inverter type Outlet filter type Catalogue number
EL - ZVF 9-G0007S2 DL - 5EBL5/40 422013

EL - ZVF 9-G0015S2 DL - 10EBL5/40 422014
EL - ZVF 9-G0022S2 DL - 16EBL5/40 422015
EL - ZVF 9-G0007T4 DL - 5EBL5/40 422016
EL - ZVF 9-G0015T4 DL - 5EBL5/40 422017
EL - ZVF 9-G0022T4 DL - 10EBL5/40 422018
EL - ZVF 9-G0037T4 DL - 16EBL5/40 422019
EL - ZVF 9-G0040T4 DL - 16EBL5/40 422020
EL - ZVF 9-G0055T4 DL - 16EBL5/40 422021
EL - ZVF 9-G0075T4 DL - 25EBL5/40 422022
EL - ZVF 9-G0110T4 DL - 35EBL5/40 422023
EL - ZVF 9-G0150T4 DL - 50EBL5/40 422024
80
www.elmarkgroup.eu ELM 2500 soft starters
Soft starters are designed to control the start of three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. A number of motor
control issues are avoided through them, and namely: prolonged start moments, auto-ignition of motor, there is no need of star-
delta switching, auto-transformer switching, resistant switching, etc. The ELM 2500 soft starter pertains to the AC53b type of
starters as per the standard requirements and it provides rotation of motor and once the operation mode is set, a shunt
contactor of the LT 1 D/F series is switched to control motor operation as the soft starter is not designed to control motors in a
set mode. Under a stop command in accordance with the selected control scheme, the soft starter can or can not be included in
shutting the motor down.
Functions:
1. System functions
- over-voltage protection – motor will switch off when power supply exceeds the preset limits
- overload protection – protects the motor from overloading
- phase loss protection
- temperature overload protection
Documents corresponding to 2. Control functions
the product: - output faults
- motor faults diagnostics
Standard EN60947-4-2 - keyboard or outward control
EN 60947-1 - delayed start option
The products are in accordance - faults memory
with the directives of EC “Low Technical features:
voltage directives (LVD) no. * Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz
73/23 EEC” and * Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10%
“Electromagnetic Compatibility * Unbalance of phases: < 3%
Directives (EMC) * Frequency fluctuation: < 5%
no. 89/336 EEC”. * Obligatory bypass contactor installation
E9 * Mounting :
- mounting to a flat surface through bolts
Note: When more than one soft starter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by side and when this is
not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided.
Dimensions (mm)
Type of soft starter

А В С E F d
Е А EL M25015 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6

EL M25022 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25037 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25045 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
EL M25055 250 153 162 219 140 Ø6
F EL M25075 510 260 194 389 232 Ø8
С
B
R ST
L A
QF
S3 Lt2 S2 S1
R S T 15 14 13 12 11 10
PE RST BX STOP RUN CM
LT1-D/Fxx
HFR1000
U V W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Y1 Y2 Y3 T1 T2 T3 30A 30B 30C

LT 2 Exx
LT 1 D/Fxx
Type of soft starter Power of Rated current Type of bypass Section of Catalogue
motor (А) contactor power supply number
( kW ) conductors
EL M25015 15 30 LT 1-D 50 10 42225015

L1 N
EL M25022 22 45 LT 1-D 50 10 42225022
EL M25037 37 76 LT 1-D 80 16 42225037
M 90
EL M25045 45 LT 1-D 95 25 42225045
EL M25055 55 110 LT 1-F 115 25 42225055
EL M25075 75 150 LT 1-F 150 35 42225075
81
Programmable timers www.elmarkgroup.eu
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15A
The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation.
The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is possible to adjust eight ON/OFF cycles. Using the buttons you can
programme a day of the week (the whole week, working days or off-days), time of starting of the cycle and time of
switching off. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute.
Technical data:
* Display: LCD
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
Cat.N * Operations: 8 switching ON/OFF
50036 * Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C)
* Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days
* Power consumption: <5VA
* Switched on indicator
* Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles
* Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10 - +40°C
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC
* Commutating capacity:
- active load: up to 6A
- inductive load: up to 2.5
* Weight: 120g
Mounting: E10
* DIN-rail 36 64
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15B
The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is possible to adjust six ON/OFF cycles. Using the buttons you can
programme a day of the week (the whole week, working days or off-days), time of starting of the cycle and time of
switching off. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute. There is possibility for automatic correction of the
time according to the seasonal sun variations.
Technical data:
* Display: LCD
Cat.N * Automatic adjustment of the current time (time correction winter/summer)
50101 * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Operations: 6 switching ON/OFF
* Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C)
* Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days
* Switched on indicator
- inductive load: up to 2.5
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
36 64
82
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Programmable timers
Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 20

The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is possible to adjust forty-eight ON/OFF cycles. Using the buttons you can
programme time of starting of the cycle and time of switching off. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 15
minutes. The battery allows programme storing at lack of power supply.
Technical data:
* Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C)
* Battery for programme storing and operation: up to 150 hours
Cat.N * Power consumption: <5VA
50100 * Switched on indicator
* Li-Ion battery: 150h
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
E10
Tariff switching clock (timer) TE 18

The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used for switching on tariff lighting in housing buildings and switching off
after the adjusted time. Easy to adjust time intervals, mounting and conducting. Reliable to use.
Technical data:
* Adjustment range: 0.5 to 20 min
Cat.N * Number of contacts: 1NO
35005 * Commutating capacity:
- inductive load: up to 10 A
* Weight: 75g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Time relay “star/delta” TE 19

The time relay is manufactured under the most modern methods of qualitative and reliable materials. The timer is
adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used to provide reliable and safe time hold at “star/delta” starters. It gives possibility
for time adjustment for motor unwinding in star up to 600s and time change to delta according to the consumer’s need.
Technical data:
* Adjustment range for operation in star: 1 to 600 seconds
* Repetition accuracy: ±5% from the whole scale
* Adjustment accuracy: ±5% from the whole scale
Cat.N * Zeroing time: <0.5s
50102 * Power consumption: <5VA
* Electrical wear resistance: 100 000 cycles
* Mechanical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles
* Commutating capacity: up to 5A
* Indication:
- at operation in “star”: red indication
- at operation in “delta”: green indication
* Weight: 150g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
83
Programmable timers www.elmarkgroup.eu
Timer TE8A – 1a
The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise,
qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation of the timers without charging up to 150 hours. The
timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. There is possibility for adjustment of eight programmes for a day or a week with
minimal interval of 1 minute for switching on and off. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time
in hours, minutes and seconds.
Technical data:
Cat.N * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles
50113 * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10ºC - +55ºC
* Temperature of storage: up to 70C
* Two outlet relays
* Weight: 150g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Timer TE8A – 2a E10

qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation of the timers without charging up to 150 hours. The
timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It has two operating channels, each of which can adjust four programmes for a
day or a week with minimal interval of 1 minute for switching on and off. Indication on LCD display with high resolution
and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Technical data:
Cat.N * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles
50114 * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles
* Temperature of storage: up to 70°C
* Weight: 150g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Timer TE6B
qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is
adjusted – direct or reverse. There is possibility to adjust the time range from 0.01 second to 99 hours 59 minutes,
possibility for correction of the set values during operation. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing
the time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Technical data:
* Possibility for choice of operating range:
Cat.N - from 0.01 second to 99.99 seconds
50104 - from 1 second to 99.59 minutes
- from 1 minute to 99.59 hours
* Error: <0.01% ±0.05s
* Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms
* Commutating capacity at active load: 3A
* Weight: 300g
Mounting:
* on the front panel of the board
84
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Programmable timers
Timer TE48S-S
qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is
adjusted – direct or reverse. It represents two separate operating channels, each of which can operate independently with
time range adjustment from 1 second to 99 minutes, possibility for correction of the set values during operation. Indication
on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Technical data:
* Admissible variation of the input voltage: 85-110%U
Cat.N * Possibility for choice of operating range:
50105 - from 1 to 99 seconds
- from 1 minute to 99 minutes
* Error: <0.01% ±0.05s
* Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms
* Commutating capacity at load: 3A
* Weight: 300g
Mounting:
E10 * on the front panel of the board
indication
indication
Adjusting block
indication
Т2 Time setting
Т1 Time setting
Timer ТЕ 19M
Timer is developed using modern technologies from quality and reliable materials and is adapted for mounting on DIN
rail. It is used for providing time intervals in eight time programs, which are assigned by combinations of the keys. There
is an option for it to operate in time ranges (assigned by the keys K4, K5,K6): seconds, minutes or hours depending on
the necessity of the user. Power contact up to 3A.
* Input voltage: 230V; 50Hz
* Range of setting: from 0.6 sec to 100 hours
* Accuracy of setting: ± 5% from the whole scale
Cat.№ * Time for nullifying: <0.5 seconds
50102M * Consumed capacity: < 5VA
* Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 100 000 cycles
* Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 1 000 000 cycles
* Operation temperature: -10 - +55°С
* Humidity: 45 - 85%RH
* Computing option: up to 5А
* Indication:
- on power supply: red indication
- on operational output relay: green indication
* Weight: 150 gr.
* Time functions: according to the programming guide
Mounting method:
* DIN rail
85
Digital counters www.elmarkgroup.eu
Universal digital counter CE2J

The device is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting and high counting
reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display with
black lighting digits, providing excellent visibility at different lighting. The counter is to be mounted on the front panel of
the boards. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet
operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point.
Documents corresponding to the product:

Standard EN 61010-1
Cat.N
Protection indicator Outlet channel indicator
50111 Technical data:
* Display: LCD
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz Power supply indicator
Current value
* Counting range: 0 - 99999
* Counting speed: 30/3k cps Set value 1 and 2
Set
value 68
* Zeroing: outside impulse
Setting
* Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years buttons (1~6)
Return button
* Operating temperature: -10-+40°C System
return button Operational Display
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH button button
* Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A 68

* Weight: 250g
Mounting:
* on the front panel E11
* opening with dimensions: 45x45
65
90
Combined digital counter/timer CE10J

The device is for front mounting in the board. It can be used as a counter or timer choosing a definite combination from
keys. It is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting, precision at operation
as a timer and high reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a
digital display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation
or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for
changing the position of the decimal point.
Documents corresponding to the product:

Cat.N Standard EN 61010-1
50120
Technical data:
* Display: LCD operating
* Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz value
* Counting range: 0 – 999

set
* Timer range: 0.01 – 99h99min value 68
* Counting speed: 30/500 cps
* Zeroing: outside impulse
* Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years functional
button
68
* Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* on the front panel
* opening with dimensions: 45x45
68
86
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Digital counters
Total digital counter CE15J

The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as an impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that purpose
there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight
digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with
accumulation.
Technical data:
* Display: LCD
* Power supply voltage: built in battery
Cat.N * Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC
50112 * Counting accuracy: <0.002%
Documents corresponding to * Data storing battery: up to 5 years
the product: * Operating temperature: -5-+40°C
Standard EN 61010-1 * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Total digital counter CE15L

The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as a time impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that
purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5 years. It has
eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for time impulse sequence counting
with accumulation. It displays the operated time.
E11
Technical data:
* Display: LCD
* Power supply voltage: built in battery
Cat.N * Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC
50115 * Counting accuracy: <0.002%
* Battery for data storing: up to 5 years
Documents corresponding to * Operating temperature: -5-+40°C
the product: * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
Standard EN 61010-1 * Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
Phase sequence indicator EK - RSTB

The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used for control and indication of the presence, sequence and quality of the
phases. The device indicates the following fault:
- lack of one or several phases;
- change in the sequence of the phases;
- lowering of the power supplying voltage: under 10%;
- increasing of the power supplying voltage: over 10%;
- phase asymmetry of the power supplying voltage: ±10%
In the presence of one of the conditions above a relay starts operating in the device which breaks the controlling circuit.
Cat.N The time between fault indication and outlet relay switching on can be adjusted in order to prevent unwilling stops at very
50103 short breaks. When the voltage is back to normal limits, the device receives energy (indication lights) according to the
hysteresic values. At phase sequence fault the device operates immediately.
the product: Technical data:
Standard EN 61010-1 * Power supply voltage: 400V; 50Hz
* Possibility for operation range adjustment: 0.1 – 10 seconds
* Possibility for working range adjustment: from 300 to 480 V
* Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles
* Mechanical wear resistance: 10 000 000 cycles
* Indication:
- green LED – indication for a change in the condition
- red LED - failure
* Weight: 120g
Mounting:
* DIN-rail
87
Industrial Relays
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Industrial Relays and Bases

Devices intended for construction of automation and signalling boards. They are mainly used for command transfer
towards the executive mechanisms. Currents of comparatively heavy values enabling the direct control of industrial
executive mechanisms are commuted in comparatively small sizes. The contact surfaces are made from silver-coated
electrolytic copper. The entire contact system is closed within a lid of colourless fire-proof plastic with a test-button
installed to it. The base provides a safe electric connection of the conductors of the electric installation and the relays and
is used to install the relay to the DIN busbar.
Technical Characteristics:
* Supply voltage: from 12 to 230V АС, 50 Нz and from 12 to 110V DC
* Acceptable deviation of the supply voltage: 85 -110% Un
* Rated current of the sockets: 10А АС
Documents corresponding to * Electrical endurance: 1 000 000 cycles
the product:EN 60947-5-1; * Isolation resistance: 500 mΩ /min (500V)
EN 61810 * Impulse tension resistance: 2000V, 50Нz
* Dielectric strength: 1000V АС/1 min
* Turn-out time: 25ms
* Working temperature: -5 - + 65°С
* Humidity: 35 - 85% RH
Method of installation:
* on a DIN rail by means of a socket
Relay type Voltage of the coil Socket type Resistance of the coil Catalogue number E12
(V) (Ω)
ELM - 14FC 12 VDC PSF14A 270 57141

ELM - 14FC 24 VDC PSF14A 1080 57142
ELM - 14FC 48 VDC PSF14A 4340 57143
Relay type Voltage of the coil Socket type Resistance of the coil Catalogue number
(V) (Ω)
ELM - 60.2 12 VAC ELM - 90.22 20 57601

ELM - 60.2 24 VAC ELM - 90.22 80 57602
ELM - 60.2 48 VAC ELM - 90.22 320 57603
ELM - 60.2 230 VAC ELM - 90.22 7400 57605
ELM - 60.13 12 VAC ELM - 90.23 20 57611
ELM - 60.13 24 VAC ELM - 90.23 80 57612
ELM - 60.13 48 VAC ELM - 90.23 320 57613
ELM - 60.13 110 VAC ELM - 90.23 1700 57614
ELM - 60.13 230 VAC ELM - 90.23 7400 57615
Relay type Voltage of the coil Socket type Resistance of the coil Catalogue number
(V) (Ω)
ELM - 55.02 12 VAC ELM - 94.3 42 57521

ELM - 55.02 24 VAC ELM - 94.3 168 57522
ELM - 55.02 48 VAC ELM - 94.3 675 57523
ELM - 55.02 230 VAC ELM - 94.3 14000 57525
ELM - 55.04 12 VAC ELM - 94.4 42 57541
ELM - 55.04 24 VAC ELM - 94.4 168 57542
ELM - 55.04 48 VAC ELM - 94.4 675 57543
ELM - 55.04 110 VAC ELM - 94.4 3500 57544
ELM - 55.04 230 VAC ELM - 94.4 14000 57545
Relay type Resistance of the coil Catalogue number

(Ω)
ELM - 14A 8 57901

ELM - 94.3 11 57902
ELM - 94.4 14 57903
ELM - 90.22 8 57904
ELM - 90.23 11 57905
88
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Devices for temperature measurement
Digital temperature regulator TK2T – K; J; Pt 100

The device is used for temperature control and indication in industrial projects. It allows the following and regulation of
temperature in range up to 999°C depending on the mounted measuring element – thermo pair or thermo resistance. It is
offered in versions for the most popular types of measuring elements – K (CA); J (IC) PT 100 as the last letter of the type
defines the measuring element type. The device is to be mounted on the front panel of the boards. It is easy to program
through a combination of buttons on the front panel. On the LCD display are values of the set and actually measured
temperature on different lines. The device allows easy change of the set temperature and possibility for choice of
switching on PID regulation law. It allows easy adjustment of the regulation, and the mounted SSR relay makes it
convenient for thyristors control and provides high operation reliability.
Technical data:
Documents corresponding to * Admissible deviation of the power supply voltage: 85 – 110%Un
the product: * Inlet signal: thermo pair K, J or thermo resistance PT 100
Standard EN 61010-1 * Outlet: S:SSR
* Failure outlet: relay
* Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles
* Indication:
- green LED – indication for the measured (current) temperature
TK 2 T - K 50121 - red LED – indication for the set temperature
TK 2 T - J 50122 * Insulation resistance: 20 mΩ min (500V)
TK 2 T - Pt100 50123 * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 2000V; 50Hz
E13 * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
Mounting:
Thermocouple and thermo resistance

The thermo-measuring elements are designed for measuring the temperature in the point of contact between the surface
(warmed or cooled) and the thermo-element. They are a comparatively cheap and the most wide-spread method for
temperature measurement. The thermocouples are produced by accumulating two conductors from a special measuring
alloy in one common head. Each of these elements has a specific electromotive voltage at a specific temperature. The
temperature measuring is based on the difference in the electromotive powers between the hot and the cool end of the
thermocouple, while this difference in the form of voltage of several milivolts is supplied at the input of the
thermoregulator, which displays the measured temperature. Each thermocouple is produced and calibrated for measuring
of specific temperature ranges depending on the alloys of which it is made. When thermocouples measuring great
distances from the thermoregulators are used (more than 15 points), it is obligatory to use compensatory cable
corresponding to the type of the thermocouple. The thermo-resistant elements action is based on the capacity of specific
alloys, very often Pt100 to change their resistance when the temperature is changed. For each temperature value is
specified a value of resistance. This value is supplied at the input of the thermoregulator, which displays the measured
temperature.
Each thermoregulator operates with a specific type of thermo-element.
Type of thermo-element Symbol Temperature range Type of catching Sizes of the head Size of the free end Catalogue number
K WRNT - 01 -15 ÷ 95°C nut 30 x 35 1m 50K95G

K WRNT - 01 0 ÷ 400°C nut 30 x 35 1m 50K40G
K WRNT - 31 0 ÷ 400°C Bayonet 30 x 35 0.5m 50K40B
K WRNT - 13 0 ÷400°C explosion-proof Ø6 2m 50K40EX
J WRKT - 01 0 ÷400°C nut 30 x 35 1m 50J40G
J WRKT - 13 0 ÷400°C explosion-proof Ø6 2m 50J40EX
Pt100 WXPT - 13 -15 ÷95°C explosion-proof Ø6 2m 50PT95EX
Pt100 WXPT - 13 0 ÷400°C explosion-proof Ø6 2m 50PT40EX
89
Current measurement transformesr www.elmarkgroup.eu
Current measurement transformers MSQ – xx type

The measurement transformers find application at current measuring, current regulation, systems for current
characteristics watching, systems for reactive energy compensation, signaling, etc. They are with x/5 gear ratio as X is
the inlet range of the transformer.
Technical data:
* Maximum operating voltage: 720V; 50Hz
* Admissible deviation of the operating current: 1.2 x In
* Inlet current: 50 – 1200A
* Outlet current: 5A
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min)
Documents corresponding to * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH
the product: * Precision class: 0.5
Standard EN 61010-1; Mounting:
EN 60044-1; EN 60044-6 * vertically or horizontally to the power supplying rails according to the opening of the transformer
E14
MSQ -30
Range Precision Capacity Weight Catalogue number
class VA kg
50/5 0.5 5 0.60 45050А

75/5 0.5 5 0.60 45075А
100/5 0.5 5 0.60 45103А
150/5 0.5 5 0.60 45153А
MSQ -40
class VA kg
200/5 0.5 10 0.60 45204А

250/5 0.5 10 0.60 45254А
300/5 0.5 10 0.60 45304А
400/5 0.5 10 0.60 45404А
500/5 0.5 10 0.60 45504А
600/5 0.5 10 0.60 45604А
MSQ -60
class VA kg
400/5 0.5 15 0.60 45406А

500/5 0.5 15 0.60 45506А
600/5 0.5 15 0.60 45606А
800/5 0.5 15 0.60 45806А
1000/5 0.5 15 0.60 45906А
1200/5 0.5 15 0.60 45916А
90 89
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Voltage transformers
JBK5 - xxx main transformer
Functions:
It reduces main voltage within standard range
* separates the galvanic power supply circuit from the operation circuit
Technical features:
* Input voltage: 400 or 230 V
* Output voltage: 230-110-48V or 110-48-24V
* Frequency : 50/60Hz
* Short circuit resistance: unstable
* Temperature class: В (130ºC)
Documents corresponding to * Construction: open (to be installed in other products)
the product: * Magnetic circuit: cold rolled electric furnace steel
Standard EN 61010-1 * Coils: pure electric copper
* Protection degree: Ip00
Connection:
* flexible or hard conductors of relevant section to terminals
Mounting:
* Mounting in distribution boards or products
* fastening: by means of screws/bolts to the surface
* position: vertical
* ambient temperature: -20 ÷+40ºС
E15
G
E
d
F
C D
Initial Secondary Dimensions

Type voltage voltage Power
(V) (V) VA Catalogue number
C D E F G d
EVT5 - 150VA 230 48-24-12 150 100 80 100 50 110 20 45241
EVT5 - 150VA 400 48-24-12 150 100 80 100 50 110 20 45441
EVT5 - 250VA 230 48-24-12 250 130 100 120 53 130 20 45242
EVT5 - 250VA 400 48-24-12 250 130 100 120 53 130 20 45442
EVT5 - 500VA 230 48-24-12 500 150 113 133 53 140 20 45245
EVT5 - 500VA 230 110-48-24 500 150 113 133 53 140 20 45215
EVT5 - 500VA 400 48-24-12 500 150 125 133 53 140 20 45445
EVT5 - 500VA 400 110-48-24 500 150 125 133 53 140 20 45415
EVT5 -1000VA 230 48-24-12 1000 170 125 150 65 155 20 45241
EVT5 - 1000VA 400 48-24-12 1000 170 125 150 65 155 20 45441
EVT5 - 1600VA 230 48-24-12 1600 190 125 150 65 170 20 452416
EVT5 - 1600VA 400 48-24-12 1600 190 125 150 65 170 20 454416
91
Displaying measurement devices www.elmarkgroup.eu
Digital voltmeter/amperemeter EKDP 15 A/V

Digital device adjusted for DIN-rail mounting and offered in two types:
-amperemeter
-voltmeter
It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has high
accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is
possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure constant current
(AD,DV) and alternating current (AA,VA) quantities.
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz
* Inlet signal:
Documents corresponding to - operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the range is adjusted from inside)
the product: - operating as amperemeter: 5 – 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside)
Standard EN 61010-1 Note: At current range over 5A a current measurement transformer should be used
* Consumption: <5A
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min)
* Humidity: 35 – 85%RH inlet
EKDP-15AA 50117A * Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale
EKDP-15AD 50117D * Display: LCD
EKDP-15VA 50116A * Weight: 150gr
EKDP-15VD 50116D Mounting:
* DIN-rail E16
power supply
Digital voltmeter/amperemeter and frequency meter EKDP7

Digital device adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards and offered in the following types:
- amperemeter:
EKDP7 – AA – amperemeter for alternating current
EKDP7 – DA – amperemeter for direct current
- voltmeter:
EKDP7 – AV – voltmeter for alternating current
EKDP7 – DV – voltmeter for direct current
EKDP7 – Hz – frequency meter
It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has high
accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is
possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure direct current
Documents corresponding to and alternating current quantities.
the product:
Standard EN 61010-1 Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz
* Inlet signal:
Type Catalogue number - operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the range is adjusted from inside)
- operating as amperemeter: 5 – 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside
Note: For high current range a current measurement transformer should be used for alternating current device and a
EKDP7-AV 50106 measurement shunt for direct current.
EKDP7-AA 50107
* Consumption: <5A
EKDP7-DV 50108
EKDP7-DA 50109 * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min)
EKDP7-HZ 50110 * Operating temperature: -5-+50°C
* Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale
* Display: LCD
* Weight: 130gr
Mounting:
92
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Displaying measurement devices
Electronic electrometers for mounting on a DIN rail type DDS 722/DTS 722
Electronic monophase and three-phase electrometers designed for measuring active energy adapted for mounting on
DIN rail. They perform direct measuring of electric energy, while the measured quantity of electric energy is displayed on
a seven-digit LCD display. No additional calibration of the system is needed.
* Direct measuring of current: up to 30 (100) А; 50/60Hz
* Automatic temperature compensation
* Light indication on loss of phase
* Indication for reverse connection
* Indication for faulty measuring
* Measuring class: 1
the product:
12.5
Standard IEC 61036
35
45
88
67
88
63
44
127 68
E16 75
73
Monophase Three-phase
Type designation Measuring range Precision Voltage Note Catalogue number

class (V)
DDS722 - 10 10 (40) 1 230 - 50210

DDS722 - 15 15 (60) 1 230 - 50215
DDS722 - 30 30 (100) 1 230 - 50230
DTS722 - 10 3x10 (40) 1 400 - 50410
DTS722 - 15 3x15 (60) 1 400 - 50415
DTS722 - 30 3x30 (100) 1 400 - 50430
Analogue (pointer) panel meters SD72 type for build-in

Analogue devices adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards. Designed for frequency measurement,
capacity, alternating or direct voltage and current of the power supply grid. They are manufactured on the basis of bridge
measurement schemes. There is possibility for display change for the higher scopes of measuring.
Designation Type of the Precision Range Note Catalogue number

panel meter measurement system class
amperemeter АС MEMSI 1.5 0-40А - 50118

amperemeter АС MEMSI 1.5 0-100А current transfer 100/5 654010
the product:
Standard EN 60051-1 amperemeter АС MEMSI 1.5 0-600А current transfer 600/5 654060
voltmeter АС* MEMSI 1.5 0-500V - 50125
frequency meter** МЕ 0.5 45-65Hz - 50126
cosφ meter MEMSI 1.5 3P 400V - 50127
amperemeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-5A - 50128
amperemeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-50A outer resistor 60mV 50129
voltmeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-50V - 50130
voltmeter DC MEMC 1.5 0-100V - 50131
wattmeter MEMSI 1.5 0-3000W 1P240V - 50132
wattmeter MEMSI 1.5 0-3000W 3P 3 line - 50133
wattmeter MEMSI 1.5 0-3000W 3P 4 line - 50134
Note: MEMSI - magnetic-electrical movable steel instrument; MEMC – magnetic-electrical movable coil
* Possibility for supplying with voltage transformer X/100V for range expanding
** Possibility for voltage 110, 230, 400V
93
Manual meters www.elmarkgroup.eu
Digital multimeter ЕМ5510

This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features automatic
range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3
¾ . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic
interferences. It has an automatic switch off.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 0.4 / 4 / 40 / 400 / 600 V
* AC voltage : 4 / 40 / 400 / 600V
* DC current: 400μ / 4000μ / 40m / 400m / 10A
Cat. № * AC current: 400μ / 4000μ / 40m / 400m / 10A
5195510 * Resistance: 400 / 4K / 40K / 400K / 4M / 40MΩ
* Capacitors: 4η / 40η / 400η / 4μ / 40μ / 100μF
* Frequency: 10 / 100 / 1k / 10k / 100k / 200kHz
* Loading cycles: from 0.1% to 99.9%
* Temperature: -20° up to 1000°С
* Humidity: 30% to 95%
* Illumination: 4000 Lux / 40000 Lux
* Noise level: 35 to 100dB
* Circuit control: yes
* Diodes control: yes
* Weight: 310 g (including battery)
* Battery: 1x9V
* Dimensions: 83 х 162 х 47mm
E17
Digital multimeter ЕМ420C

This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features automatic
range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of
16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic
interferences. It has an automatic switch off.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V
* AC voltage : 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V
* DC current: 200μ / 2000μ / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A
Cat. № * AC current: 00μ / 2000μ / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A
519420 * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20MΩ
* Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V
* battery: 3x1.5 V
* dimensions: 75 х 158 х 35mm

This is a digital device for measuring of all electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD display
showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 3 ½ . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion,
precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V
* AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V
* DC current: 2m / 20m / 200m / 10A
* AC current: 200m / 10A
Cat. № * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200MΩ
5193055 * Capacity: 2000p / 20η / 200η / 20μF
* Temperature: 0° up to 1000°С
* Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V
* Transistor test: Vce≈3V , Ib≈10μF
* battery: 1x9V
94
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Manual meters
Digital multimeter EM3058

This is a digital device for measuring of temperature and all electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual
value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 ¾ . It is of high accuracy of
analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic
switch off.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V
* AC voltage: 200 m / 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V
Cat. № * DC current: 20μ / 200 μ / 2m / 200m / 10A
5193058 * AC current: 20μ / 200μ / 2m / 200m / 2 / 10A
* Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200MΩ
* Capacitors: 2η / 20η / 200η / 2μ / 20μF
* Frequency: 20kHz to 2000kHz
* Loading cycles: 0.1% to 99.9%
* Temperature: 0° up to 1000°С
* Logical level: High > 2.0 V; Low < 0.8 V
* battery: 1x9V
* dimensions: 97 х 200 х 47 mm
E17
This is a digital device for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It
has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-
digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off
and low battery indication.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V
* AC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V
Cat. № * DC current: 240μ / 2400μ / 24m / 240m / 10A
519031 * AC current: 240μ / 2400μ / 24m / 240m / 10A
* Resistance: 240 / 2400 / 24K / 240K / 2400K / 24MΩ
* Capacity: 25η to 252μF
* Frequency: 50 / 500 / 5000 / 50k / 0.5 MHz
* battery: 2x1.5 V
Digital multimeter / pen ЕМ3215

This is a digital device for measuring of electric values in the form of a pen. It features automatic range adjustment,
manual value selection. It has an LCD display, data retain function, automatic reset, polarity selection, range overload
indication. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic
interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low battery indication and a torch.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V
* AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V
Cat. № * DC current: 20m to 200mA
5193215 * AC current: 20m to 200mA
* Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20MΩ
* Logical level: High > 2.3V; Low < 0.8 V
* battery: 1x9V
95
Manual meters www.elmarkgroup.eu
Digital clamp meter EM202

This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual value
selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3½ mm. It is of high accuracy of
analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic
switch off.
Technical features:
* DC voltage: 1000 V
* AC voltage: 750V
* AC current: 20 / 200 / 1000A
Cat. № * Resistance: 200 kΩ
519202 * Temperature: -40° up to 1400°С
* battery: 1x9V

This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value
selection. It has an LCD display, low battery indication, overload protection. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital
conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off.
Technical features:
E17
* AC voltage: 750V
* DC current: 200 / 1000A
* AC current: 200 / 1000A
Cat. № * Resistance: 200 kΩ
519204 * Frequency: 2 kHz
* battery: 1x9V
This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD display
and retain function option, low battery indication and overload protection.
Technical features:
* AC voltage: 750V
* AC current: 200 / 1000A
* Resistance: 200 / 20 kΩ
Cat. № * Diodes control: yes
519266 * Weight: 310 g (including battery)
* battery: 1x9V
Infrared temperature meter EM520A

This is a digital device for measuring of temperature.The temperature is measured with no contact. It has a laser counter
for precision measuring, suitable large LCD display, battery low indication and overload protection.
Technical features:
* Temperature: -20° up to 320°С / -4° to 608 °F
* Distance to point size: 6:1
* Precision: ±2° C or 2% in reading
* battery: 1x9V
Cat. №
519520
96
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Manual meters
Phase meter Gk7

A device indicating phase availability in the system. No contact phase indicator featuring sound and light indication of
phase availability.
Technical features:
* Voltage range: from 50 to 1000V
* Frequency range: from 50 Hz to 500 Hz
* dimensions: length – 62mm
Cat. №
519GK7
E17
Digital detector 4 in 1 series TS530

This is a device for detecting metals, voltage and live conductors, wooden struts, or piping sections. The device has a 2-
meter measuring tape. It features light and sound indication. When an object is located, the display light blinks and marks
with increasing position. Once the exact position is located, a light point is marked on the wall through a button.
Technical features:
* 2-meter measuring tape
* Pen: marking the located detail
* Piping section: metal pipe up to 25mm
Cat. № * Wooden struts: 30x30mm
519530 * Live conductors detection: 50mm for 90 ~ 250V; 50/60Hz
* battery: 1x9 V
* dimensions: 73 x 180 x 32mm
Industrial repair kit ETK06A

A finely packaged repair kit containing four elements in a metal briefcase, sealed with special plastic foam and struts for
each instrument.
The kit includes:
* Digital multimeter EM420

* Digital clamp-on ammeter EM465
* Phase meter GK7
* Infrared temperature meter EM520A
Cat № 51906A
97
Accessories www.elmarkgroup.eu
Bell transformer
Modified for power supply of bells and other signal devices with alternating voltage 8V, 12V, 24V and capacity up to 3.8A.
* The voltage of the primary winding voltage is 230V
* Mounting on DIN-rail
Cat.№
5001
Bell
Used for sound signalization in housing and industrial buildings.
* Sound level: 80 dB
Consumption: E18
-3.6VA for power supply 8 -12V
-5VA for power supply 230V
* Mounting on DIN-rail
Type Un (V) Catalogue number
8-12 5012
Bell
230 5220
Plug for mounting on DIN rail

Plug German type type for Din rail mounting. It provides plug presence in electric boards and easy cabling.
* Supply voltage: 230V
* Computing option: up to 16А
* Operation temperature: from -10 up to +40°С
* Humidity: up to 85%RH
Mounting method:
* DIN rail
Elements for automation, monitoring and control
98
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Limit switches
The all-purpose limit switches are installed on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines.
The miniature limit switch is mounted in an aluminum shell, resistant to vibrations, lubricants and water.
Product conformity documentation:
Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
All-purpose limit switch – series TZ-6xxx
* Dielectric strength: 1000V AC
* Insulating resistance: 100mΩ
* Contact resistance: 15mΩ
* Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load
* Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000
* Gearing speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5 m/s
* Protection degree: IP65
* Cable input: cable gland PG11
* Section of power supply conductor: up to 1.5mm2
Type of Power of Power of Switching General Rated Type Catalogue

the head starting release position movement current number
metal 15А-active
cylinder 350g 115g 0.5mm 5.5mm TZ-6001 466001
5A-inductive

F1
oil-resistant 15А-active
metal 800g 240g 2mm 5mm TZ - 6101 466101
cylinder 5A-inductive

oil-resistant
cylinder 15А-active
with 500g 100g 1mm 3.5mm TZ - 6102 466102
metal roll 5A-inductive

oil-resistant
horizontal 15А-active
lever 640g 230g 5mm 6mm TZ - 6104 466104
with metal 5A-inductive
roll

oil-resistant
vertical 15А-active
lever 640g 230g 5mm 6mm TZ -6143 466143
with metal 5A-inductive
roll

spring - -
lever 150g 20° TZ - 6106 466106
99
Limit switches www.elmarkgroup.eu
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used in automatic systems as a control element. They are used for setting of
gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They
feature a vibration-resistant metal shell.
Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
All-purpose limit switch – series SCA-xxx
* Mechanical endirance (number of cycles): 1 000 000
* Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s
* Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
metal 10А-active
cylinder 800g 400g 2.0mm 5.8mm CSA - 001 46А001
4А-inductive

F1
cylinder 10А-active
with metal 800g 400g 2.0mm 5.8mm CSA - 003 46А003
roll 4А-inductive

horizontal 10А-active
lever with 800g 400g 2.0mm 5.8mm CSA - 012 46А012
metal roll 4А-inductive

adjustable 10А-active
lever with 400g 100g 22.5° 95° CSA - 031 46А031
metal roll 4А-inductive

lever with 10А-active

metal 400g 100g 22.5° 95° CSA - 021 46А021
roll 4А-inductive

spring 10А-active
lever 150g 50g 22.5° 50mm CSA - 081 46А081
4А-inductive
100
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Limit switches
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors
and other linear progressive motion machines. They have small dimensions and a vibration-resistant metal shell with
plastic lid, resistant to oil and water.
Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
All-purpose limit switch – series TZ-8xxx
* Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s
* Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm
lever with
plastic 5А-active
roll 750g 100g 20° 50° 3А-inductive TZ - 8104 468104

F1 adjustable
lever with 5А-active
plastic 750g 100g 20° 50° 3А-inductive TZ - 8108 468108
roll

cylinder
with metal 900g 150g 1.5mm 4.0mm 5А-active
roll 3А-inductive TZ - 8112 468112

metal 5А-active
900g 150g 1.5mm 4.0mm
cylinder 3А-inductive TZ - 8111 468111

metal 5А-active
rod 750g 100g 20° 50° TZ -8107 468107
3А-inductive

spring 150g - - 5А-active

lever 30mm 3А-inductive TZ - 8167 468167
101
Limit switches www.elmarkgroup.eu
The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors
and other linear progressive motion machines. They have aluminium shell of high mechanic strength and resistance to
oil, water and pressure.
Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
All-purpose limit switch – series CWL-xxx
* Contact resistance: 15mΩ
* Gearing speed: 1mm/s to 2 m/s
* Cable input: cable gland
* Metal shell
* Vibration-resistant

metal 10А-active
cylinder 2720g 910g 2.0mm 6.4mm 3А-inductive CWLD 46LD
Type of
the head
Power of
starting
Power of
release
Switching
position
General
movement
Rated
current
Type Catalogue
number
F1
cylinder
with metal 2720g 910g 2.0mm 5.6mm 10А-active CWLD2 46LD2
roll 3А-inductive

lever with
metal 1360g 227g 20° 50° 10А-active
roll 3А-inductive CWLCA2-2 46LCA2-2

adjustable
lever with 2720g 910g 20° 50° 10А-active
metal roll 3А-inductive CWLCA12-2-Q 46LCA12-2-Q

fork 1200g - 55° 90±10° 10А-active CWLCA32-41 46LCA32-41
3А-inductive
oil-resistant
spring 150g - 28mm 10А-active 46LNJ
lever 3А-inductive CWLNJ

142g 28g 20° 50° 10А-active CWLCL 46LCL

metal rod 3А-inductive
102
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Proximity sensor
Proximity induction sensors are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance
of metal elements motion. They can also be used in other machine systems applications as no contact control sensors for
level of liquids, control sensors for the speed and position of rotating chains, etc. They are developed on the base of PNP
and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic
lid which is oil and water resistant.
All-purpose proximity switch – series LM xx
* Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω
* Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm
* Precision of repetition: 0.01
* Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +70˚С
* Gearing speed: 5mm/s
* Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC L C
* Protection degree: IP 67
Object LC circuit Switch Terminal repeater
Type Start Power supply Type of Type of Output Min. size Catalogue
distance voltage transition contact load of object number
EL-LM8-3002NA 2 mm 24 VDC NPN NO 130 mA 8x8x1 46LM 8-32NA
EL-LM8-3002NB 2 mm 24 VDC NPN NC 130 mA 8x8x1 46LM 8-32NB
EL-LM8-3002PA 2 mm 24 VDC PNP NO 130 mA 8x8x1 46LM 8-32PA
EL-LM8-3002PB 2 mm 24 VDC PNP NC 130 mA 8x8x1 46LM 8-32PB
EL-LM8-2002A 2 mm 230 VAC SCR NO 150 mA 8x8x1 46LM 8-22A
EL-LM8
EL-LM12-3004NA 4 mm 24 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 15 x 15 x 1 46LM 12-34NA
F2 EL-LM12-3004NB 4 mm 24 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 15 x 15 x 1 46LM 12-34NB
EL-LM12-3004PA 4 mm 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 15 x 15 x 1 46LM 12-34PA
EL-LM12-3004PB 4 mm 24 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 15 x 15 x 1 46LM 12-34PB
EL-LM12-2004A 4 mm 230 VAC SCR NO 300 mA 15 x 15 x 1 46LM 12-24A
EL-LM18-3008NB 8 mm 24 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 18 x 18 x 1 46LM 18-38NB
EL-LM12
EL-LM22-3010NB 10 mm 24 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 22 x 22 x 1 46LM 22-30NB
EL-LM18
EL-LM12-4002A 2 mm 230 V inductive NO 100 mA 15 x 15 x 1 46LM 12-44A
EL-LM12-4002B 2 mm 230 V inductive NC 100 mA 15 x 15 x 1 46LM 12-44B
EL-LM22
103
Capacitive sensors www.elmarkgroup.eu
Capacitive sensors are used in machine systems and equipment for no-contact motion surveillance. They consist of two
coaxial electrodes, a condenser and RC generator. This type of sensors reacts to both metal and non-metal objects, as
the gearing distance for non-metal objects depends on their dielectric constants. They allow gearing distance adjustment
for non-magnetic conductive materials. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small
dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant.
Capacitive sensors – series CM xx
* Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +70˚С
EL-CM12
* Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC
General scheme of a capacitive transducer
Object Inductive RC generator Switch Output

surface amplifier stage
Type Start Power supply Type of Type of Output Note Catalogue

distance voltage transition contact load number
EL-CM18
EL-CM12-3004NA
EL-CM12-3004NB
0~4 mm
0~4 mm
24 VDC
24 VDC
NPN
NPN
NO
NC
200 mA
200 mA
46CM 12-32NA
46CM 12-32NB
F3
EL-CM12-3004PA 0~4 mm 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 46CM 12-32PA
EL-CM12-3004PB 0~4 mm 24 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 46CM 12-32PB

EL-CM18-3008NA 0~8 mm 24 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 46CM 18-38NA
EL-CM18-3008NB 0~8 mm 24 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 46CM 18-38NB
EL-CM18-3008PA 0~8 mm 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 46CM 18-38PA
EL-CM18-3008PB 0~8 mm 24 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 46CM 18-38PB
EL-CM18-2008A 0~8 mm 230 VAC SCR NO 300 mA 46CM 18-28A
EL-CM24

EL-CM24-3012NA 8 mm 24 VDC NPN NO 200 mA 46CM 24-12NA
EL-CM24-3012NB 8 mm 24 VDC NPN NC 200 mA 46CM 24-12NB
EL-CM24-3012PA 8 mm 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA 46CM 24-12PA
EL-CM24-3012PB 8 mm 24 VDC PNP NC 200 mA 46CM 24-12PB
EL-CM24-2012A 8 mm 230 VAC SCR NO 300 mA 46CM 24-12A

EL-SM12-3110NA 10 mm 24 VDC NPN NO 200 mA Sensor of Hall 46SM 12-31NA
EL-SM12 EL-SM12-3110NB 10 mm 24 VDC NPN NC 200 mA Sensor of Hall 46SM 12-31NB
EL-SM18-3110PA 10 mm 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA Sensor of Hall 46SM 18-31PA
EL-SM18-3110PB 10 mm 24 VDC PNP NC 200 mA Sensor of Hall 46SM 18-31PB

EL-XM18-305PMII 5 mm 24 VDC индуктивен NO 100 mA current type 46XM 18-35A
EL-XM18-305PMU 5 mm 24 VDC индуктивен NC 100 mA voltage type 46XM 18-35B
EL-XM24-308PMI 8 mm 24 VDC индуктивен NO 300 mA current type 46XM 24-38A
EL-XM24-308PMU 8 mm 24 VDC индуктивен NC 300 mA voltage type 46XM 24-38B
EL-XM18
104
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Photoelectrical sensors
Photoelectrical sensors of the Gxx series are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no
contact surveillance of motion of elements. They are based on the photoelectric principle of operation – inside the sensor
there is a photo signal emitter and receiver of the returned signal. There are three types of sensors: diffuse sensors,
reflector sensors and emitter-receiver sensors. These types of sensors differ in the way of returning the signal. They allow
for gearing distance adjustment. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small
dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant.
Technical features:
EL-G12 * Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +70˚С
* Ratedl voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC
Truth beam type

Type Start Power supply Type of Type of Output Type of Catalogue
distance voltage transition contact load sensor number
EL-G12-3A07NA 70 mm 24 VDC NPN Ø12; l=50 200 mA Diffuse 46G12A071
Emitter Receiver EL-G12-3A07PA 70 mm 24 VDC PNP Ø12; l=50 200 mA Diffuse 46G12A072
EL-G12-3B1NA 1m 24 VDC NPN Ø12; l=50 200 mA Reflector 46G123B11
EL-G12-3B1PA 1m 24 VDC PNP Ø12; l=50 200 mA Reflector 46G123B12
EL-G12-3C3NA 3m 24 VDC NPN Ø12; l=50 200 mA Truth beam 46G123C11
EL-G12-3C3PA 3m 24 VDC PNP Ø12; l=50 200 mA Truth beam 46G123C12
Object
EL-G18

Reflector type
F4 EL-G18-3A10NA
EL-G18-3A10PA
100 mm
100 mm
24 VDC
24 VDC
NPN
PNP
Ø18; l=70
Ø18; l=70
200 mA
200 mA
Diffuse
Diffuse
46G18A101
46G18A102
EL-G18-3B2PA 2m 24 VDC PNP Ø18; l=70 200 mA Reflector 46G183B12
Emitter- EL-G18-3C5NA 5m 24 VDC NPN Ø18; l=70 200 mA Truth beam 46G185C11
receiver Reflector EL-G18-3C5PA 5m 24 VDC PNP Ø18; l=70 200 mA Truth beam 46G185C12
Object
EL-G30 Start Power supply Type of Type of Output Type of Catalogue
Diffuse type Type
EL-G30-3A70NA 500 mm 24 VDC NPN Ø22; l=70 200 mA Diffuse 46G30A101
EL-G30-3A70PA 500 mm 24 VDC PNP Ø22; l=70 200 mA Diffuse 46G30A102
Emitter EL-G30-3B3PA 3m 24 VDC PNP Ø22; l=70 200 mA Reflector 46G303B12
Object
EL-G30-3C101NA 10 m 24 VDC NPN Ø22; l=70 200 mA Truth beam 46G305C11
EL-G30-3C101PA 10 m 24 VDC PNP Ø22; l=70 200 mA Truth beam 46G305C12

EL-G35 EL-G35-3A50NA 500 mm 24 VDC NPN NO 200 mA Diffuse 46G35A101

EL-G35-3A50PA 500 mm 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA Diffuse 46G35A102
EL-G35-3B3NA 3m 24 VDC NPN NO 200 mA Reflector 46G353B11
EL-G35-3B3PA 3m 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA Reflector 46G353B12
EL-G35-3C5NA 5m 24 VDC NPN NO 200 mA Truth beam 46G355C11
EL-G35-3C5PA 5m 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA Truth beam 46G355C12

EL-G50-3A30NA 500 mm 24 VDC NPN NO 200 mA Diffuse 46G50A101
EL-G50-3A30PA 500 mm 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA Diffuse 46G50A102
EL-G50-3B4NA 4m 24 VDC NPN NO 200 mA Reflector 46G503B11
EL-G50-3B4PA 4m 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA Reflector 46G503B12
EL-G50
EL-G50-3C5NA 5m 24 VDC NPN NO 200 mA Truth beam 46G505C11
EL-G50-3C5PA 5m 24 VDC PNP NO 200 mA Truth beam 46G505C12

EL-BZJ-211 10 mm 24 VDC Reflector NO <200 mA Colour detector 46BZJ211
EL-BZJ-311 9mm 24 VDC Reflector NO <200 mA Colour detector 46BZJ311
EL-BZJ-411 9mm 24 VDC Reflector NO <200 mA Colour detector 46BZJ411
EL-BZJ
105
Rotary switches www.elmarkgroup.eu
Rotary switches LW26 series
The rotary switches LW26 series are produced for switching on/off electrical circuits with commutated current from 20 to
160A. They are designed on the bases of the rotor-eccentric switching on which is realized through turning of the handle
to 60 or 90 degrees. The normal operation is used for commutation of two, three or four conductor systems. There are
special rotary switches that switch on under given connection schemes and are used to control motors, electric welding
machines and other consumers.
Documentation corresponding to the product:

Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3-1
Technical data:
* Power supply voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz
* Insulation voltage: 690V
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V
* Mechanical wear resistance: 3x105 commutation cycles
* Humidity: 35 – 85% RH
* Commuting capacity: up to 160A according to the tables
* Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
* :
- IP42 for the ordinary breakers mounted in a panel
- IP65 for the breakers offered in a box
* Cable connection: screw joining
* Tightening moment of the bolt: 1.33N
* Maximum section of the power supply conductors: according to the dimensions table
* Weight: according to the number of the contacts F5
Mounting:
* directly to the control panel
* thickness of the surface to which it is mounted: max 5mm
Dimensions
Designation Front panel Joining Overall dimensions (mm) Mounting dimensions (mm)
conductor (mm2) A B C L a b d1 d2
LW26-20 M1 panel 1x2.5 48 48 43 22 + 9.6n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5

M1 panel with inscription field 48 60 43 22 + 9.6n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5
LW26-25 M1 panel 1x4.0 48 48 45.2 23+12.8n 36 36 Ø8.5 Ø4.5
LW26-32 M2 panel 1x6.0 64 64 58 29.2 + 12.8n 48 48 Ø10 Ø4.5
LW26-63 M2 panel 1x16 64 64 66 29.2 + 21.5n 48 48 Ø10 Ø4.5
LW26-125 M3 panel 1x35 88 88 84 35 + 26.5n 68 68 Ø13 Ø6
LW26-160 M3 panel 1x50 88 88 88 35 + 32.5n 68 68 Ø13 Ø6
106
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Rotary switches
Scheme In (A) Levels Type number Catalogue number
Q10 20 2 LW26 - 20Q 492201

three-poles
switching on; 25 2 LW26 - 25Q 492251
motor starting and 32 2 LW26 - 32Q 492321
stopping; 63 2 LW26 - 63Q 492631
voltage turning 125 2 LW26 - 125Q 492951
on/off to the
consumers 160 2 LW26 - 160Q 492961
Q11 20 2 LW26GS - 20/04 492207

three-poles switching
over; 25 2 LW26GS - 25/04 492257
motor starting and 32 2 LW26GS - 32/04 492327
stopping;
voltage turning on/off to 63 2 LW26GS - 63/04 492637
the consumers;
possibility for access
control
F5
N11 20 3 LW26 - 20N 492202

3-position –
25 3 LW26 - 25N 492252
2 start positions and
1 stop; 32 3 LW26 - 32N 492322
for motor reversing 63 3 LW26 - 63N 492632
125 3 LW26 - 125N 492952
160 3 LW26 - 160N 492962
S19
25 4 LW26 - 25S 492253
3-position –
2 start positions and 1 63 4 LW26 - 63S 492633
stop; 125 4 LW26 - 125S 492953
for two speed motor 160 4 LW26 - 160S 492963
control;
switching over between
charging*
Note: It is necessary that additional bridges be placed at switching over between charging
107
Rotary switches www.elmarkgroup.eu
S21 25 4 LW26 - 25 SD 492025

3-position
63 4 LW26 - 63 SD 492063
switching on star/delta
H5881/3 – 85 32 3 LW26 - 32H 5881/3 492324

for welding transformer
63 3 LW26 - 63H 5881/3 492634
windings switching over
F5
YH5/3 - 66 20 3 LW26 - 20 YH5/3 492205

for voltage switching over
LH3/3 - 58 20 3 LW26 - 20 LH3/3 492206

for amperemeter
switching on to
current transformers
Scheme Type number IP code Catalogue number

IP
Box for LW26-20/25 LW26 - 20-25-Q 42 492037

Box for LW26-32 LW26 - 32-Q 42 492038
Adaptor for DIN-rail
LW26 - 20-25-DIN 492039
for LW26-20/25
108
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Rotary switches
Scheme In (A) Levels Type number Catalogue N 0 O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

7 1
1 2
6 2
3 4
4.I7168/7 20 7 LW26 4.I7168/7 492028 5 3 5 6
4
7 8
4.I7168/7 9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
1
Scheme In (A) Levels Type number Catalogue N 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 3 1 2
3 4
4.H6518/5 25 5 LW26 4.H6518/5 492029 6 4
5 5 6
7 8
4.H6518/5
9 10
11 12
13 14
F5 15 16
17 18
19 20
Scheme In (A) Poles Type number Catalogue N LW30-20-100A

ON/OFF switch 3 poles
LW30-20 20 3 LW30-20 492030
LW30-32 32 3 LW30-32 492031 L1 L2 L3
LW30-40 40 3 LW30-40 492033
LW30-63 63 3 LW30-63 492034
T1 T2 T3
* Possibility for access control
IP55 Scheme In (A) Poles Type number Catalogue N LW30-20-100A

ON/OFF switch 3 poles
LW30-32 32 3 LW30-32 IP54 492032

L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
* Possibility for access control
109
Buttons and LED indicators www.elmarkgroup.eu
Buttons and LED indicators

These are devices used in control and indication systems, command boards and panels in industrial automation systems.
They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off executive mechanisms
such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices
endure short time current overload up to 10A, and normally they can commutate thermal current up to 6A in their contact
system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which operational conductors with section
up to 2.5mm2 can be joined.

Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1
Technical data:
* Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V;
* Rated current: 6A (230V AC); 0.3A (230V DC)
* Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG outside in the circuit
* Mechanical wear resistance: 1x106 commutation cycles
* Power of mechanical compression:
- at closing: 20N
Overall dimensions
- at opening: 8N
Diagram for drill the openings * Operating temperature: -20 - +70°C
* Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 0.15Nm
* Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm2
Mounting:
* to a flat metal or plastic surface with thickness: max 4mm
* opening with size: Ø 22.5mm F6
Type Description Type of contacts Rated current Colour Catalogue Note

(А) at 400V number
EL 2- BA 21 Button round NO 6 black 401021

EL 2- BA 31 with spring reverse NO 6 green 401031
EL 2- BA 51 NO 6 yellow 401051
EL 2- BA 61 NO 6 blue 401061
EL 2- BA 42 NC 6 red 401042
Type Description Type of contacts Rated current Colour Catalogue Note

(А) at 400V number
EL 2- BР 31 NO 6 green 401032 IP=65

Button round Provided from silicon lid
with spring reverse
EL 2- BР 42 NC 6 red 401043 IP=65
Provided from silicon lid
110
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type Description Voltage for the Rated current Colour Catalogue Note
indicator (А) at 400V number
EL 2- BW3471 24V 6 red 401474

EL 2- BW3371 24V 6 green 401374
EL 2- BW3571 24V 6 yellow 401574
EL 2- BW3671 24V 6 blue 401674
EL 2- BW3471 110V 6 red 401473
Button round with green
EL 2- BW3371 spring reverse 110V 6 401373
EL 2- BW3571 110V 6 yellow 401573
and LED indicator blue
EL 2- BW3671 110V 6 401673
EL 2- BW3471 230V 6 red 401471
EL 2- BW3371 230V 6 green 401371
EL 2- BW3571 230V 6 yellow 401571
EL 2- BW3671 230V 6 blue 401671
Type Description Type of Rated current Colour Catalogue Note

contacts (А) at 400V number
EL 2- BD 21 Switch with arrest 1NO 6 black 401421 two-position
EL 2- BD 33 Switch with arrest 2NО 6 black 401433 three-position
F6

Button with head red

EL 2- BС 42 1NС 6 401642 spring reverse
“mushroom” type

Button with head

EL 2- BS 545 “mushroom” type 1NС+1NO 6 red 401545 elease with spinning
111
Buttons and LED indicators www.elmarkgroup.eu

Button double Green and red button

EL 2- BW8475 1NO+1NС 6 401845
+ LED indicator

Change-over switch two-position

EL 2- BG 21 1NO 6 401121
with switch with switch
F6
AD56-22 Un Colour Type number Catalogue number
230V AC white AD56-22-W-230 401123

110V AC white AD56-22-W-110 401111
24V AC/DC white AD56-22-W-24 401124
110V AC amber AD56-22-А-110 401211
24V AC/DC amber AD56-22-А-24 401224
230V AC amber AD56-22-А-230 401223
230V AC green AD56-22-РG-230 401323
LED indication 110V AC green AD56-22-РG-110 401311
24V AC/DC green AD56-22-РG-24 401324
230V AC blue AD56-22-B-230 401523
110V AC blue AD56-22-B-110 401511
24V AC/DC blue AD56-22-B-24 401524
230V AC yellow AD56-22-Y-230 401723
110V AC yellow AD56-22-Y-110 401711
24V AC/DC yellow AD56-22-Y-24 401724
230V AC red AD56-22-R-230 401423
110V AC red AD56-22-R-110 401411
24V AC/DC red AD56-22-R-24 401424
EL02 - BЕ10x Type of the contact Colour Type number Catalogue number
1 1 NO green EL02 - BЕ101 401001

2 1 NC red EL02 - BЕ102 401002
112
www.elmarkgroup.eu
EL1 - B134 Overall dimensions (mm) Type of the contact Colour Type number Catalogue number
L H W
switching on
0-1 68 68 50 1 NO black EL1-B134 401134
IP44
L H W
1 button with spring

68 68 50 1 NO green EL1-B102 401102
return IP44
1 button with spring 68 68 50 1 NO green EL1-BP102 401132

return IP65
IP44/65
F6
L H W
2 buttons with spring 1 NC 1 - red

104 68 50 EL1-B213 401213
return IP44 1 NO 1 - green
2 buttons with spring 1 NC 1 - red

104 68 50 EL1-BP213 401233
return IP65 1 NO 1 - green
IP44/65
L H W
1 NO 1 - green
3 buttons with spring
134 68 50 1 NC 1 - red EL1-B339 401339
return IP44
1 NO 1 - green
1 NO 1 - green
3 buttons with spring
134 68 50 1 NC 1 - red EL1-BP339 401349
return IP65
1 NO 1 - green
IP44/65
EL1 - B174
Emergency button Overall dimensions (mm) Type of the contact Colour Type number Catalogue number
with head “mushroom”
type Ø40 L H W
Release
68 68 50 1 NC red EL1-B174 401174
through turning
IP44
113
Buttons and LED indicators for DIN-rail www.elmarkgroup.eu
71 -0.43
66±0.37
These are devices used in control and indication systems adjusted for mounting in command boards and panels directly
49.5±0.31 on DIN-rail. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off executive
mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields.
The devices endure short time current overload up to 20A, and normally they can commutate current up to 10A with their
contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which operational conductors with
section up to 2.5mm2 can be joined. There are also designed buttons combined with lamps.
45±0.31
35±0.5
Technical data:
* Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V;
* Rated current: up to 10A (230V AC)
* Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG outside in the circuit
* Rated consumed current (for indicators and buttons combined with indicators): <20mA
Documents corresponding to * wear resistance (indicators): >2000h
the product: * Mechanical wear resistance (buttons): 1x106 commutation cycles
Standardт EN 60947-1 * Power of mechanical compression:
EN 60 947-5-1 - at closing: 20N
- at opening: 8N
* Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 0.15Nm
* Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm2
Mounting:
* to a DIN-rail
F7
Type Description Rated current Colour Type of Catalogue

(A) at 400V contacts number
ELB - BL - DIN button <10 black 2NO+ 1 NC 401505

ELB - BL - DIN button <10 black 1NO+ 2 NC 401506
ELB - G - DIN button <10 green 2NO+ 1 NC 401507
ELB - G -DIN button <10 green 1NO+ 2 NC 401508
ELB - Y - DIN button <10 yellow 2NO+ 1 NC 401509
ELB - Y - DIN button <10 yellow 1NO+ 2 NC 401510
ELB - R - DIN button <10 red 2NO+ 1 NC 401512
ELB - R - DIN button <10 red 1NO+ 2 NC 401513
Tип
Type Description Voltage Rated current Colour Catalogue
(V) (A) at 400V number
ELD - G - DIN lamp 230V <20 green 401500

ELD - R - DIN lamp 230V <20 red 401501
ELD - Y - DIN lamp 230V <20 yellow 401502
ELD - B - DIN lamp 230V <20 blue 401503
ELD -W - DIN lamp 230V <20 white 401504
Type Description Voltage Rated current Colour Type of Catalogue

(V) (A) at 400V contacts number
ELBD - G - DIN button + lamp 230V <20 green 2NO+ 1 NC 401514

ELBD -G - DIN button + lamp 230V <20 green 1NO+ 2 NC 401515
ELBD - R - DIN button + lamp 230V <20 red 2NO+ 1 NC 401516
ELBD - R - DIN button + lamp 230V <20 red 1NO+ 2 NC 401517
ELBD - Y - DIN button + lamp 230V <20 yellow 2NO+ 1 NC 401518
ELBD - Y - DIN button + lamp 230V <20 yellow 1NO+ 2 NC 401519
114
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Devices for telpher control
Devices for telpher control MBP type
They represent different combinations of START and STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in different sizes. They are
connected to the operating circuits of cranes or telphers and serve as a remote control of their movement. They are
connected directly to the operating cable of the telpher and send commands directly to the executive mechanisms. They
are designed to provide protection from dust and moisture IP65.
Technical data:
* Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz
* Consumed power: <5VA
* Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles
* Operating temperature: -10 +40°C
* Dampness: 35 – 85% RH
* Number of contacts: according to the number of the buttons
* Commuting capacity: up to 6A
* IP code: IP65
* Weight: according to the number of the contacts
Mounting:
* directly to the control cable of the telpher (crane)
МВР-Ахххх stop button type

button type – one-speed (x81) or two-speed (x91)
number of buttons
Number of buttons Contact block and scheme Type Catalogue Package

F8 number
Emergency For the directions
2 - NO+NC MBP-A281 46281 1
2 - NO+NC MBP-A291 46291 1

two-speed
2+1 emergency button NO+NC MBP-A2813 46283 1

emergency button
2+1 NO+NC MBP-A2813К 46283K 1
with switch
two-speed
4 - NO+NC MBP-A481 46481 1
4 - NO+NC MBP-A491 46491 1

two-speed

emergency button
4+1 NO+NC MBP-A4813К 46483K 1
with switch
two-speed
6 - NO+NC MBP-A681 46681 1
6 - NO+NC MBP-A691 46691 1

two-speed

emergency button
6+1 NO+NC MBP-A6813K 46683K 1
with switch
two-speed
8 - NO+NC MBP-A881 46881 1
8 - NO+NC MBP-A891 46891 1

two-speed

emergency button
8+1 NO+NC MBP-A8813K 46883K 1
with switch
two-speed
High power safety devices and isolating switches
115
Bases for high power safety devices
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Bases for high power safety devices
Documents corresponding to The series bases for high power safety device is manufactured of permitivity alloy with mounted contact jaws of
the product: electrolytic copper supplied with special springs for contact compression and easy fuse links taking out. All current
Standard EN 60269-1 leading parts are connected to inlet outlet terminals with bolts; the terminals also end with bolts, to which the power
supply conductors are connected. The bases are offered in five type sizes corresponding to the five types of fuse links.
Base type Overall dimensions

(mm)
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C1 C2 Ød
SIST00 25 100 120 - 30 25 60 7.5
SIST 0 25 150 170 - 30 37 72 7.5
SIST1 25 175 200 30 58 38 84 10.5
SIST2 25 200 225 30 60 38 100 10.5
SIST3 25 210 250 30 60 40 105 10.5
G1
Base type Fuse link type Rated Rated voltage Weight Catalogue number
current (А) Un (V) (gr)
SIST00 NТ 00 up to160 600 193 12001
SISP00 NT 00 up to 160 600 215 12001Р
Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain
SIST0 NТ 0 up to 160 600 295 12010
SISP0 NT 0 up to 160 600 319 12010P
SIST1 NТ 1 up to 250 600 550 12100
SISP1 NT 1 up to 250 600 550 12100P

116
Fuse links for high power safety devices
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Base type Fuse link type Rated current (А) Rated voltage Weight Catalogue number
Un (V) (gr.)
SIST2 NТ 2 up to 400 600 770 12200
SISP2 NT 2 up to 400 600 810 12200Р
Base type Fuse link type Rated current (А) Rated voltage Weight Catalogue number
Un (V) (gr.)
SIST3 NТ 3 up to 630 600 965 12300
SISP3 NT 3 up to 630 600 987 12300P
Documents corresponding to Fuse links for high power safety devices

the product:
Standard EN 60269-1 The series fuse links for high power safety devices is designed for short circuit protection. They are distinguished with
EN 60269-2 high speed of operation and high reliability. The element is a ceramic (porcelain) body filled with fine quartz sand for
voltaic arc lowering. In the ceramic body is mounted a fusible, specially profiled wafer connecting the current leading
G2 terminals. These terminals are manufactured of copper alloy with special nickel coating and have the form of knives to
provide more contact surface. The fuse links correspond to “gL – gG” class which means that they are with common
function and normal response time.
Technical data:
* Rated short circuit current: 120 kAeff
* IP code: IP 00
* Ambient temperature: -5 to +55°C
Overall dimensions
Fuse link type (mm)
A B C D H
NT00 78 40 15 29 56.5
NT 0 125 68 15 29 56.5
NT1 135 68 21 48 62
NT 2 150 68 27 58 72
NT 3 150 68 33 67 84.5
117
Fuse links for high power safety devices
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type
NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00 NT00
In 32
(A) 16 25 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Un(V) 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500, 600
Cat. 10001 10002 10003

№ 10004 10005 10006 10008 10009 10012 10016
Type
NT 0 NT 0 NT 0 NT 0 NT 0 NT 0 NT 0 NT 0 NT 0 NT 0
In 32
(A) 16 25 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Un(V) 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500, 600
Cat. 10015 10025 10032

№ 10040 10050 10063 10080 10090 10092 10096
Type
NT 1 NT 1 NT 1 NT 1 NT 1 NT 1 NT 1
G2
In
(A) 80 100 125 160 200 225 250
Un(V) 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500, 600
Cat.
№ 10108 10110 10112 10116 10120 10122 10125
Type
NT 2 NT 2 NT 2 NT 2 NT 2
In
(A) 160 200 250 315 400
Un(V) 500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 500, 600
Cat.
№ 10216 10220 10225 10231 10240
Type
NT 3 NT 3
In
(A) 500 630
Un(V) 500,600 500,600
Cat.
№ 10350 10363
118
Isolating switches
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Documents corresponding to Designed in two types – horizontal and vertical. They represent a combination of low voltage isolating switch and high
the product: power safety devices mounted in a common plastic corpus. They are used for low voltage distribution boards and
Standard EN 60947-1; complete transformer substations (CTS) where visible circuit distribution is necessary. They provide safety and
EN 60947-3 convenience at fuse links change. The plastic corpus increases the IP code and the plastic lid provides simultaneous
circuits switching on/off. The lid allows easy removing which is additional measure at repairs. The vertical isolating
switches are mounted directly to the power supply rails which enables the exploitation and improves the safety of the
staff.
Technical data:
* Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted fuse links
* Number of poles: 3
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
* IP code: IP 40
Isolating Overall dimensions (mm)

switch
type A B C D E
THB -160 160 73 82 45 151
THB - 250 184 128 111.5 66 214.5
THB - 400 210 145 128 88 255

G3 THB - 630 256 142.5 267
175 94.5
THB - horizontal
Type THB THB THB THB
In
(A) 160 250 400 630
Un(V) 500, 660 500, 660 500, 660 500, 660
Fuse
link size
NT00 NT1 NT2 NT3
Cat.
N 44801 44802 44803 44804
Type HG2B HG2B HG2B HG2B
In
(A) 160 250 400 630
Un(V) 500, 660 500, 660 500, 660 500, 660
Fuse
link size NT00 NT1 NT2 NT3
Cat.
N 44805 44806 44807 44808
HG2B - vertical
119
Switch disconnector
www.elmarkgroup.eu
The series of switch disconnectors EL-D02 are developed for short-circuit protection. They have a high speed of start and
high reliability. They have a plastic body of inflammable plastics adapted for mounting on a DIN rail, where a porcelain
round plug, which is filled with fine quartz sand for extinguishing the electric arc. In this ceramic body is mounted melting,
specifically profiled plate, which connects the input power terminals. These terminals are produced from copper alloy with
especially laid nickel layer and contact with the projecting bolts from the plastic body. Locking system for the security plug
on replacement of burnt out.
* Insulation voltage: >2500V
* Rated current on short-circuit: 120 кА
* Direct mounting to the load
Documents corresponding to * Two insulated points to the load
* Protection rate: IP 44
the product:
* Cross-section of the supply conductors: up to 35mm2
Standard EN 60947-3
* Environmental temperature: -5° до +55°С
VDE 0638
Type Number of poles Rated current Type of the fuse Catalogue number Box / Carton
(А)
EL - D02-32 1P+N 32 RO 26/32 10D0232 6 / 180
EL - D02-63 1P 63 RO 26/63 10D0261 6 / 180
EL - D02-63 1P+N 63 RO 26/63 10D0262 3 / 90
EL - D02-63 2P 63 RO 26/63 10D0265 3 / 90 G4
EL - D02-63 3P 63 RO 26/63 10D0263 2 / 60
EL - D02-63 3P+N 63 RO 26/63 10D0264 1 / 120
Type of the fuse Voltage Rated current Size of the fuse Catalogue
(V) (А) number
RO 26/32 500 2 Ø12.5x31.5mm 10R0232

RO 26/32 500 4 Ø12.5x31.5mm 10R0234
RO 26/32 500 6 Ø12.5x31.5mm 10R0236
RO 26/32 500 10 Ø12.5x31.5mm 10R0240
RO 26/32 500 16 Ø12.5x31.5mm 10R0246
RO 26/32 500 20 Ø12.5x31.5mm 10R0248
RO 26/32 500 25 Ø12.5x31.5mm 10R0245
RO 26/32 500 32 Ø12.5x31.5mm 10R0243
RO 26/63 500 40 Ø15x35mm 10R0640
RO 26/63 500 50 Ø15x35mm 10R0650
RO 26/63 500 63 Ø15x35mm 10R0660
Industrial plugs and sockets
120
Industrial plugs
www.elmarkgroup.eu
c
Industrial plugs and sockets Ht/HTN type
They are specially developed plugs and contacts designed for mounting in industrial buildings or outdoors. Made of
special high quality plastic with impurity against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength.
They are designed in accordance with standard IEC 309-1 and provide reliable connection and high protection rate of the
staff from electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 44/67. They are designed in types for indoors and
a
outdoors mounting, and with movable or static plugs and sockets.
b
Technical data:
* Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted protection in the boards
* Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
Documents corresponding to * Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles
the product: * IP code: IP 44/67
Standard EN 60309-1; * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
EN 60309-2 * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55°C
* Plugs and sockets: 6h
Model Ingress
Order type In Un Dimensions (mm) Catalogue Package /Box
Poles protection
number (A) (V) a /b /c number
rating IP
HT-013 16 1P+N+E 230 121 / 84 / 53 44 37013 10 / 100

HT-023 32 1P+N+E 230 138 / 92 / 63 44 37023 10 / 100
H1
Model Ingress
Poles protection
rating IP
HT-014 16 3P+E 400 121 / 84 / 51 44 37014 10 / 100

HT-024 32 3P+E 400 138 / 92 / 63 44 37024 10 / 60
HT-034 63 3P+E 400 230 / 109 / 36 44 37034 1 / 10
HT-044 125 3P+E 400 295 / 124 / 50 44 37044 1 / 10
Model In Un Ingress
Order type Dimensions (mm) Catalogue Package /Box
(A) Poles (V) protection
number a /b /c number
rating IP
HT-015 16 3P+N+E 400 129 / 92 / 62 44 37015 10 / 100

HT-025 32 3P+N+E 400 149 / 97 / 70 44 37025 10 / 60
HT-035 63 3P+N+E 400 230 / 109 / 36 44 37035 1 / 10
HT-045 125 3P+N+E 400 295 / 124 / 50 44 37045 1 / 10
Model Ingress
Poles protection
rating IP
HTN 0131 16 1P+N+E 230 120/71/12 67 37131 1 / 40

HTN 0231 32 1P+N+E 230 150/93/17 67 37231 1 / 40
121
Static industrial plugs
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Model Ingress
In Un Dimensions (mm) Catalogue Package/Box
Order type Poles protection
(A) (V) a /b /c number
number rating IP
HTN 0141 16 3P+E 400 125/79/12 67 37141 10 / 60

HTN 0241 32 3P+E 400 150/93/17 67 37241 10 / 40
HTN 0341 63 3P+E 400 230/109/36 67 37341 1 / 10
HTN 0441 125 3P+E 400 230/109/36 67 37441 1 / 10
Model Ingress
number rating IP
HTN 0151 16 3P+N+E 400 133/87/12 67 37151 10 / 60

HTN 0251 32 3P+N+E 400 155/99.5/17 67 37251 10 / 40
HTN 0351 63 3P+N+E 400 230/109/36 67 37351 1 / 10
HTN 0451 125 3P+N+E 400 295/124/50 67 37451 1 / 10
Static industrial plugs
H2
Model Ingress
number rating IP
HT-513 16 1P+N+E 230 121/79 44 37513 10 / 60

HT-523 32 1P+N+E 230 131/83 44 37523 10 / 40
Model Ingress
number rating IP
HT 514 16 3P+E 400 121/76 44 37514 10 / 60

HT 524 32 3P+E 400 131/83 44 37524 10 / 40
HT 534 63 3P+E 400 131/83 44 37534 10 / 10
Model Ingress
number rating IP
HT 515 16 3P+N+E 400 123/79 44 37515 10 / 60

HT 525 32 3P+N+E 400 132/84 44 37525 10 / 40
HT 535 63 3P+N+E 400 132/84 44 37535 1 / 10
122
Static industrial contacts for exposed wiring
www.elmarkgroup.eu
à
32.5
Æ
34
20
13
5
58
Pg21
70.5
Model Ingress
(A) (V) a /b number
number rating IP
HT-113 16 1P+N+E 230 126 / 86 44 37113 1 / 60

HT-123 32 1P+N+E 230 141 / 97 44 37123 1 / 60
Model Ingress
(A) (V) a /b number
number rating IP
HT-114 16 3P+E 400 132 / 91 44 37114 10 / 60

HT-124 32 3P+E 400 141 / 96 44 37124 10 / 60
HT-134 63 3P+E 400 193 / 122 44 37134 1 / 10
HT-144 125 3P+E 400 220 / 140 44 37144 1 / 10
H3
Model Ingress
(A) (V) a /b number
number rating IP
HT-115 16 3P+N+E 400 129 / 96 44 37115 10 / 60

HT-125 32 3P+N+E 400 141 / 98 44 37125 10 / 60
HT-135 63 3P+N+E 400 193 / 122 44 37135 1 / 10
HT-145 125 3P+N+E 400 220 / 140 44 37145 1 / 10
Model Ingress
(A) (V) a /b number
number rating IP
HTN 1131 16 1P+N+E 230 101/150/93.5 67 37731 10 / 40

HTN 1231 32 1P+N+E 230 114/162/93.5 67 37631 10 / 40
108 123
Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Model Ingress
number rating IP
HTN 1141 16 3P+E 400 104/150/93.5 67 37741 10 / 60

HTN 1241 32 3P+E 400 116/162/93.5 67 37641 10 / 40
HTN 1341 63 3P+E 400 171/170/230 67 37842 1 / 10
HTN 1441 125 3P+E 400 171/170/230 67 37844 1 / 10
Model In Un Ingress
Dimensions (mm) Catalogue Package/Box
Order type (A) Poles (V) protection
a /b /c number
number rating IP
HTN 1151 16 3P+N+E 400 107/150/93.5 67 37751 10 / 60

HTN 1251 32 3P+N+E 400 116/162/93.5 67 37651 10 / 40
HTN 1351 63 3P+N+E 400 171/170/230 67 37852 1 / 10
HTN 1451 125 3P+N+E 400 171/170/230 67 37854 1 / 10
Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring

a
H4
Model Ingress
number rating IP
HT-213 16 1P+N+E 230 130 / 96 44 37213 10 / 100

HT-223 32 1P+N+E 230 149 / 90 44 37223 10 / 60
Model Ingress
number rating IP
HT-214 16 3P+E 400 131 / 96 44 37214 10 / 100

HT-224 32 3P+E 400 149 / 90 44 37224 10 / 60
HT-234 63 3P+E 400 230/109 44 37234 1 / 10
HT-244 125 3P+E 400 290/124 44 37244 1 / 10
Model Ingress
number rating IP
HT-215 16 3P+N+E 400 139 / 90 44 37215 10 / 60

HT-225 32 3P+N+E 400 154 / 100 44 37225 10 / 60
HT-235 63 3P+N+E 400 230/100 44 37235 1 / 10
HT-245 125 3P+N+E 400 290/124 44 37245 1 / 10
124
Industrial built in contacts
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Model Ingress
(A) (V) a /b number
number rating IP
HTN 2131 16 1P+N+E 230 131/90 67 37831 1 / 60

HTN 2231 32 1P+N+E 230 149/90 67 37931 1 / 60
Model Ingress
(A) (V) a /b number
number rating IP
HTN 2141 16 3P+E 400 131/76 67 37841 10 / 60

HTN 2241 32 3P+E 400 149/90 67 37941 10 / 40
HTN 2341 63 3P+E 400 271/115 67 37942 1 / 10
HTN 2441 125 3P+E 400 295/137 67 37943 1 / 10
Model Ingress
In Un Dimensions (mm) protection Catalogue Package/Box
Order type Poles number
(A) (V) a /b rating IP
number
H5
HTN 2151 16 3P+N+E 400 139/90 67 37851 10 / 60

HTN 2251 32 3P+N+E 400 154/100 67 37951 10 / 40
HTN 2351 63 3P+N+E 400 240/112 67 37952 1 / 10
HTN 2451 125 3P+N+E 400 300/126 67 37953 1/6
Industrial built in contacts
Model Ingress
In Un Dimensions (mm) protection Catalogue Package/Box
Order type Poles number
(A) (V) a /b rating IP
number
HT-413 16 230 70/85 44 37413 10 / 100

1P+N+E
HT-423 32 230 80/97 44 37423 10 / 60
Model Ingress
Dimensions (mm) protection Catalogue Package/Box
Order type In Poles Un
a /b number
number (A) (V) rating IP
HT-414 16 400 70/85 44 37414 10 / 100

3P+E
HT-424 32 400 80/97 44 37424 10 / 60
110 125
Distribution boxes with industrial contacts www.elmarkgroup.eu
Model Ingress
(A) (V) a /b number
number rating IP
HT-415 16 400 70/85 44 37415 10 / 60

3P+N+E
HT-425 32 400 80/97 44 37425 10 / 60
Model Ingress
(A) (V) a /b number
number rating IP
HT-105SR 16 тип шуко 230 70/70 44 37105 20 / 200
Model Ingress
(A) (V) a /b number
number rating IP
213L-2P-W 16 1P+N+E 230 450 44 37003 1 / 42
H6
Distribution boxes with mounted industrial plugs and sockets and protection devices
They are specially designed distribution boxes with mounted industrial plugs and sockets fabric cabled with possibility for
protection devices mounting (breakers, residual current devices). They are designed for building sites mounting, industrial
projects for power supply of mobile – movable consumers, exhibition centers, outdoor concerts or repair- reconstruct
operations with temporary character. The boxes are made of special high quality plastic with impurity against aging at sun
light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard IEC 309-1 and
provide reliable connection and high protection rate of the staff from electrical current. They provide IP protection not less
than IP 44/67.
Technical data:
* Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted safety fuses and residual current devices
Documents corresponding to * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV
the product: * Power supply cable: 5x10mm2
* Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles Inlet power supply Catalogue
Standardт EN 60309-1; * IP code: IP 44 Type conductor(mm2)
Outlets
number
EN 60309-2; EN 60 529 * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance
* Ambient temperature: -5 to +55°C 3 contacts 16A
* Altitude: up to 2000m EDB 100 - 401 3х2.5 53401
1P+N+E
* Overall dimensions of the box: 136x94x425 mm
1 contact 16A 3P+N+E и
EDB 100 - 402 5х2.5 53402
2 contacts 16A 1P+N+E
3 contacts 32A
EDB 200 - 401 3х2.5 53421
1P+N+E
3 contacts 16A
EDB 100 - 501* 3x2.5 53501*
1P+N+E
Note: * The distribution box is supplied with extension cable with section 3x2.5mm2
and length 1.5m
Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards
126
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Plastic distribution boards
Plastic distribution boards for exposed wiring
The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a
module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with
transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to
heat and high temperature with IP code IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the
current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing
conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
Technical data:
* Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz
* wear resistance to heat: UL 94
Documents corresponding to * IP code: IP 40
the product: * Class of current limiting: 2
Standard EN 62 208
EN60439-1; EN 60 439-3
Number of rows Module capacity Terminal Openings Dimensions (mm) Catalogue number Package / Box
(number of devices) strips number
number L W H
1 4 2 9 110 205 75 60040 1 / 20

1 6 2 9 150 205 75 60060 1 / 20
1 8 2 14 190 205 75 60080 1 / 20
1 12 3 17 260 205 75 60120 1 / 10
1 18 4 25 365 220 75 60180 1 / 10
2 24 6 34 270 330 75 60240 1 / 10
3 36 8 43 310 475 85 60360 1/5
Plastic distribution boards for buried wiring
module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with
transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to
heat and high temperature with IP code IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from indirect contact to the
I1 current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing
conductor joining. Mounted through building-in in openings on the wall under plaster or in hollow-wall (through special
clasps).
Technical data:
* wear resistance to heat: UL 94
* IP code: IP 40
Number of rows Module capacity Terminal Openings Dimensions (mm) Catalogue number Package / Box
(number of devices) strips number
number L W H
Documents corresponding to 1 4 2 9 110 205 75 60041 1 / 20

1 6 2 9 150 205 75 60061 1 / 20
the product: 1 8 2 14 190 205 75 60081 1 / 20
Standard EN 62 208 1 12 3 17 260 205 75 60121 1 / 10
EN 60 439-1;EN 60 439-3 1 18 4 25 365 220 75 60181 1 / 10
2 24 6 34 270 330 75 60241 1 / 10
3 36 8 43 310 475 85 60361 1/5
Note: At building-in in hollow-wall it is supplied with clasps for hollow-wall – 4pcs with catalogue number 60085. There are 10 sets of clasps in a package.
catalogue number 60085

112 127
Metal distribution boards www.elmarkgroup.eu
Moisture-proof distribution boards for exposed wiring
module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical installation current circles. They are supplied with
transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90.ْ They are made of white non-self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to
heat and high temperature. The special design of the lids and gaskets provides IP code IP 55. The mounted device in the
box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and
terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
Technical data:
Documents corresponding to * wear resistance to heat: UL 94
the product: * IP code: IP 55
Standard EN 62 209 * Class of current limiting: 2
EN 60 439-1;EN 60 439-3
Type Number Module Terminal Dimensions (mm) Catalogue number Package / Box
capacity Openings
of rows strips number
(number of L W H
devices) number
WP4 1 4 2 9 214 127 93 60100 1 / 20

WP6 1 6 2 9 214 162 93 60101 1 / 20
WP8 1 8 2 14 214 216 93 60102 1 / 20
WP12 1 12 3 17 270 214 93 60103 1 / 10
WP18 1 18 4 25 378 233 93 60104 1 / 10
WP24 2 24 6 34 340 288 93 60105 1/5
Stainless metal cabinets for distribution boards
The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a metal
cabinet with different dimensions. They are supplied with a special lock, plate for fixing the device, lid for the input-output
conductors, earthing stud, gaskets, etc. The door of the box can change its opening direction. They are manufactured of
whole stainless sheet steel processed with anti-corrosion and decorative coating powder style laid. They are used for low
voltage distribution boards in food, wine and tobacco industries and at special requirements regarding the corrosion wear I2
resistance in industrial projects. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
Technical data:
* Rated voltage: up to 1000V
* Maximum current: up to 800A
Documents corresponding to * Material: stainless steel
Standard EN 62 209 Mounting:
EN 60 439-1;EN 60 439-3 * vertically to a flat surface
Type Thickness of sheet metal Metal board Catalogue number

(mm) dimensions (mm)
L (height) W (width) H (depth)
SXF 25/25/15 1.0 250 250 150 54025

SXF 30/25/15 1.0 300 250 150 54030
SXF 40/30/20 1.0 400 300 200 54040
SXF 50/40/20 1.2 500 400 200 54050
SXF 60/40/20 1.2 600 400 200 54060
SXF 70/50/20 1.2 700 500 200 54070
SXF 80/60/25 1.5 800 600 250 54080
SXF 100/80/30 1.5 1000 800 300 54100
SXF 120/80/30 1.5 1200 800 300 54120
128
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Metal distribution boards
Metal cabinets for distribution boards
The metal cabinets are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a metal box
with different dimensions. They are supplied with a special lock, plate for fixing the device, lid for the input-output
conductors, earthing stud, gaskets, etc. The door of the box can change its opening direction. They are manufactured of
whole sheet metal processed with anti-corrosion and decorative coating powder style laid. They are used for low voltage
distribution boards in housing buildings, offices, shops and industrial projects. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
Technical data:
* Material: steel
Documents corresponding to * Coating: powder style painting
Standard EN 60439-1; Mounting:
EN 60 439-3 * vertically to a flat surface
Type Thickness of the steel metal Metal board Nominal working current In Catalogue number
(mm) dimensions (mm) (A)
L (height) W (widht) H (depth)
JXF 25/25/15 1.0 250 250 150 80 53025
JXF 25/30/15 1.0 250 300 150 100 53026
JXF 30/25/15 1.0 300 250 150 100 53030
I2 JXF 30/40/20 1.0 300 400 200 160 53031
JXF 40/30/20 1.0 400 300 200 160 53040
JXF 40/50/20 1.2 400 500 200 250 53041
JXF 50/40/20 1.2 500 400 200 250 53050
JXF 40/60/20 1.2 400 600 200 250 53051
JXF 60/40/20 1.2 600 400 200 250 53060
JXF 70/50/20 1.2 700 500 200 350 53070
JXF 80/60/25 1.5 800 600 250 400 53080
JXF 100/80/30 1.5 1000 800 300 630 53100
JXF 120/80/30 1.5 1200 800 300 630 53120
JXF 140/80/30 1.5 1400 800 300 800 53140
JXF 180/80/30 1.5 1800 800 300 1000 53188
JXF 180/100/30* 1.5 1800 1000 300 1250 53180
Note: *Metal board with double door

129
Module plastic distribution boards www.elmarkgroup.eu
Module boxes
Plastic distributor-boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension or tapping at cable
installations laying or as electronic meter boards. Manufactured of polycarbonate plastic or thermostatic fibre glass
material. Chemical, thermal and UV rays wear resistance. The boxes can be connected together to form boards with
different dimensions. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.
Technical data:
* Weight: 1.21(g/cm3)
* Dielectrical strength: 1014 (Ωm)
Documents corresponding to * Inflammability: 960°C
the product: * Operating temperature: -35 to + 40°C
Standard EN 60439 -1 * Material: polycarbonate/ fibre glass
EN 60439 -5 * IP code: IP 44
* Subject to recycling
Mounting:
* vertically to a flat surface
Box Type of L H W Catalogue

type material (mm) (mm) (mm) number
PXF315/280/120 polycarbonate 315 280 120 53221

H
NXF320/620/250 fibre glass 320 620 250 53200
NXF470/620/250 fibre glass 470 620 250 53201
NXF620/620/250 fibre glass 620 620 250 53202
I3
L

H
NXF780/620/250 fibre glass 780 620 250 53203
NXF930/620/250 fibre glass 930 620 250 53204
NXF1080/620/250 fibre glass 1080 620 250 53205
NXF1230/620/250 fibre glass 1230 620 250 53206
L

H type material (mm) (mm) (mm) number
NXF320/920/250 fibre glass 320 920 250 53207

NXF470/920/250 fibre glass 470 920 250 53208
NXF620/920/250 fibre glass 620 920 250 53209
NXF780/920/250 fibre glass 780 920 250 53210
L L W
NXF930/920/250 fibre glass 930 920 250 53211
NXF1080/920/250 fibre glass 1080 920 250 53212
NXF1230/920/250 fibre glass 1230 920 250 53213
H
Base Type of L H1 W Catalogue
NXFC320/1215/250 fibre glass 320 1215 250 53214

NXFC470/1215/250 fibre glass 470 1215 250 53215
NXFC620/1215/250 fibre glass 620 1215 250 53216
H1 NXFC780/1215/250 fibre glass 780 1215 250 53217
NXFC930/1215/250 fibre glass 930 1215 250 53218
NXFC1080/1215/250 fibre glass 1080 1215 250 53219
NXFC1230/1215/250 fibre glass 1230 1215 250 53220
Note: At order a box with depth 320mm can be manufactured

Boxes and cable cabinets for electric panels
130
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Cable support systems
The universal cable support systems are used for construction of cable link in closed production premises for direct
mounting on even vertical surfaces. They are perforated metal grates and accessories with standard lengths and sizes,
which are assembled on the basis of a “click” system. They allow quick construction of cable systems with many angles
and derivations. The offered choice is from tin with thickness up to 1.0 mm. and standard length of 3 m.
Type Type Width Height Tin thickness Length Weight Catalogue

Symbol mm mm mm of the channel kg number
m
Channel perforated PK -50/30* 50 60 0.55 3 3.4 56PK5030
Channel perforated РК - 100/60 100 60 0.55 3 4.40 56РК10060
Channel perforated PK - 200/60 200 60 0.55 3 5.30 56PK20060
Note: Channel perforated PK50/30 is not a click system

m
Т-derivation TS - 50/30 50 60 0.7 - 1.0о 56ТS05030
Т-derivation TS - 100/60 100 60 0.7 - 1.30 56TS10060

m
Angle KS -50/30 50 60 0.55 - 0.55 56KS05030
Angle KS - 100/60 100 60 0.7 - 0.78 56KS10060
Angle KS - 200/60 200 60 0.7 - 1.64 56KS20060
Angle KS - 300/60 300 60 0.7 - 2.51 56KS30060
Angle KS - 400/60 400 60 0.7 - 3.95 56KS40060
I4
m
Upright lid PPK -100 100 10 0.55 3 1.16 56PPK10060
Upright lid PPK - 200 200 10 0.55 3 2.66 56PPK20060
Angle lid PKS - 100 100 10 0.55 - 0.39 56PKS10060
Angle lid PKS - 200 200 10 0.55 - 0.51 56PKS20060
Angle lid PKS - 300 300 10 0.7 - 1.33 56PKS30060
Angle lid PKS - 400 400 10 0.7 - 2.60 56PKS40060
Т-lid PTS - 100 100 10 0.55 - 0.82 56PTS10060
Т-lid PTS - 200 200 10 0.55 - 1.10 56PTS20060
Т-lid PTS - 300 300 10 0.7 - 2.45 56PTS30060
Т-lid PTS - 400 400 10 0.7 - 3.45 56PTS40060
Type Type Height Tin thickness Length Catalogue

Symbol mm mm m number
Universal click KLS 60 45 1.0 0.3 56KLS6000

Wall carrier NSC100 56NSC100
Ceiling carrier NLK 50 56NLK 50
Bolt set VE -03 56VE0300
114 131
Moisture-proof junction boxes www.elmarkgroup.eu
Moisture-proof junction boxes
Plastic junction boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension or tapping at cable
installations laying. Manufactured of ABS material with openings for inlet-outlet conductors, firmed with rubber stoppers to
provide the corresponding IP code. Chemical, thermal and UV rays wear resistance. Mounted directly on the walls with
screws.
Standard: EN 60670-1
Technical data:
IP44 * Rated voltage: up to 1000V
* Material: ABS
* IP code: IP 44/66
Mounting:
* vertically to a flat surface
IP44
Box type Box dimensions (mm) Gaskets dimensions (mm) Ingress protection Catalogue number
rating IP
IP54 D L W H d C
WB50/50 50 - - 50 22.5 17 44 8070

WB80/50 80 - - 50 22.5 17 44 8071 I5
WB85/85/50 - 85 85 50 22.5 18.5 44 8072
WB100/100/70 - 100 100 70 30 23 54 8073
WB150/110/70 - 150 110 70 28 23 54 8076
WB150/150/70 - 150 150 70 35 29 54 8074
WB200/100/70 - 200 100 70 35 29 54 8075
WB200/155/80 - 200 155 80 35 29 54 8077
IP54
WB255/200/80 - 255 200 80 35 29 54 8078
WB300/250/120 - 300 250 120 35 29 54 8079
WB400/350/120 - 400 350 120 35 29 54 8080
Instruments
132
Hydraulic crimping instruments
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Hydraulic crimping pliers HT - 300 type
Functions:
* Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size
Technical data:
* Crimping head turning at 360° which facilitates the crimping of static conductors
* Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion
* Form of the crimping element: hexahedral
* Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm 2
* Section of the crimping conductors:
- AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm 2
Catalogue number: 59300 - Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm 2
* Element pressing power: 60kN
* Width of the element: 17mm
* Weight of the instrument: 3.3 kg
* Length: 460mm
* Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15
* Metal box for the instrument
* A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder
Hydraulic crimping pliers KYQ-300B type
Functions:
Technical data:
* Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion
- Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm 2
Catalogue number: 59302 * Element pressing power: 16T
* Width of the element: 22mm
* Length: 500mm
J1
* Used hydraulic oil: #23 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 23)
Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK-300 type
Functions:
Technical data:
* Element pressing power: 16T
Catalogue number: 59301 * Width of the element: 22mm
* Length: 500mm
Instruments
133
Hydraulic piercing instruments
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK – 70 type
Functions:
Technical data:
* Size of the crimping element: 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70mm 2
- AI conductors - from 4 to 70mm 2
Catalogue number: 59303 * Width of the element: 10mm
* Length: 310mm
HYDRAULIC PIERCING INSTRUMENTS
Hydraulic piercing pliers WK-8 type
Functions:
* Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion
Technical data:
* Piercing head turning at 360°
* Form of the cutting element: round
* Size of the cutting element: Ø 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm
* Piercing capacity:
Catalogue number: 54000 - sheet metal 3mm – openings up to Ø 30mm
- sheet metal 2mm – openings up to Ø 60mm
* Element pressing power: 80kN
* Thickness of the element: 25mm
* Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands – Ø16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display devices
J2
46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002
Hydraulic piercing press SYK – 15 type
Functions:
* Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion
Technical data:
* Protracting piercing head supplied with a hose for the hydraulic oil that gives possibility for piercing openings
everywhere on the metal surface
* Form of the cutting element:
- round
- square
* Size of the cutting element:
- square: 32x32mm
Catalogue number: 54001
- round openings: Ø 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm
* Piercing capacity:
- sheet metal 3mm – openings up to Ø 60.8mm
- sheet metal 2mm – openings up to Ø 115.5mm
- square opening up to 110x110mm
* Thickness of the element: 25mm
* Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands – Ø16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display devices
46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002
Instruments
134
Mechanical cutting instruments
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC – 325 type
Functions:
* Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors
* Cutting of bearing steel plated wires
* Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core
Technical data:
* Maximum section of the cable:
- for aluminum conductors up to 150mm 2
- for copper conductors up to 150mm 2
* Cutting power: 15T
Catalogue number: 59305 * Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet
* Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism
* Weight of the instrument: 0.58kg
* Length of the instrument: 260mm
* Package: blister
Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC – 400 type
Functions:
Technical data:
* Cutting power: 15T
Catalogue number: 59304 * Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet
* Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism
* Package: blister
Mechanical cable cutting pliers HS – 250 type

J3
Functions:
Technical data:
* Package: blister
MANUAL INSTRUMENTS
Instrument for conductor stripping HS – 2103 type
Functions:
* Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors
* Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm 2
* Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm 2
* Crimping of cable terminals
Technical data:
* Possibility for crimping of automobile high voltage conductors
Catalogue number: 59310 * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm 2
* Maximum section of the cable: up to 6mm 2
* Package: blister
Instruments
135
Hand instruments
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Instrument for conductor stripping HS – 2603 type
Functions:
* Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors
* Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm2
* Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm2
* Crimping of cable terminals
Technical data:
* Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm2
- cleaning of a rigid conductor: from 0.5 to 6mm2
Catalogue number: 59311 - cleaning of a flexible conductor: from 0.75 to 6mm2
* Presence of openings for cutting of bolts: from M2.5 to M5
* Package: blister
Instrument for manual crimping of conductors HD – 005 type
Functions:
* Crimping of naked cable terminals
Technical data:
* Form of the crimping head: hexahedral
* Package: blister
Instrument for manual crimping of conductors G – 301H type
Functions:
* Crimping of isolated cable terminals
Technical data:
* Length of the instrument: 220mm J4
* Package: blister
Instrument for manual crimping of conductors SN – 003 type
Functions:
* Crimping of naked cable terminals and joining bushes
Technical data:
* Possibility for crimping of cable conductors from 6 to 16mm2
* Package: blister
Instrument for manual crimping of conductors HY –200R type
Functions:
* Used for cleaning and crimping of 4, 6, and 8 core telephone or grid conductors
* Crimping of terminals/couplings for telephone or computer grids
Technical data:
* Possibility for crimping of cable conductors for 4, 6 or 8 cores
* Package: blister

Consumatives and cable terminals
136
Non-insulated butt terminals
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Non-insulated butt terminals – with coating for crimping
They are copper pipe with galvanic tin coating. They are used for joining of copper conductors – rigid or multiple
conductors with different section. The connection is accomplished through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing
of the butt terminals and the conductor.
Technical data:
* Material: copper alloy
* Coating: tin
* Application: general
Type Length Outer diameter Inner diameter Cable Catalogue

Standard: EN 61 238-1 L (mm) D (mm) d (mm) (mm2) number
GTY-4 20 5 3 4 59213
GTY-6 25 5.3 3.7 6 59201
GTY-10 30 6.3 4.5 10 59202
GTY-16 35 7.5 5.7 16 59203
GTY-25 40 9 7.2 25 59204
GTY-35 45 10.8 8.5 35 59205
GTY-50 50 12.5 9.8 50 59206
GTY-70 55 14.5 11.5 70 59207
GTY-95 60 17 13.7 95 59208
GTY-120 65 19 15 120 59209
GTY-150 70 21 16.7 150 59210
GTY-185 75 23 18.5 185 59211
GTY-240 80 26 21 240 59212
Bimetal non-insulated butt terminals – with coating for crimping
They are pipe made of two metals – copper and aluminum without galvanic coating. They are designed for joining copper
and aluminum conductors – rigid or multiple conductors with different section. The connection is accomplished through
crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt terminals and the conductor. They are used for protection against
electrochemical corrosion got at two metals contact with different chemical properties and conductivity at electrical current
feed. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.
Technical data:
* Material: copper aluminum alloy
* Coating: none
* Application: general for joining of two types of conductors
Standard: EN 61 238-1
K1
Butt terminal d1 D1 d2 D2 l1 l2 L Catalogue

type number
GTL - 1- 16 5 9 6 10 30 30 75 59214
GTL - 1- 25 6 10 7 12 30 33 82 59215
GTL - 1- 35 7 11 8.5 14 30 40 90 59216
GTL - 1- 50 8.5 13 9.8 16 32 42 95 59217
GTL - 1- 70 9.5 15 11.5 18 38 50 105 59218
GTL - 1- 95 11.5 17 13.5 21 40 50 110 59219
GTL - 1- 120 13.5 19 15 23 42 55 112 59220
GTL - 1- 150 15 21 17 25 44 55 118 59221
GTL - 1- 185 17 23 18.5 27 46 60 125 59222
GTL - 1- 240 19 26 21 30 54 60 130 59223
137
Non-insulated terminals
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Non-insulated cable terminals with coating for crimping
They are used for joining copper conductors - multiple conductors with different section to electrical devices or
connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and safe
connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for
short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper alloy with galvanic tin coating. The connection is realized through
crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. Two types are offered with standard length and
extended base. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.
Technical data:
JM * Material: copper alloy
* Coating: tin
* Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.
Bimetal non-insulated cable terminals for crimping
They are used for joining aluminum conductors - multiple conductors with different section to electrical devices or
connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and safe
connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for
short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper and aluminum alloys as in the aluminum billet is made under special
technology the copper terminal formed like an ear. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic
pressing of the terminal and conductor. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long
exploitation period.
Technical data:
* Material: copper aluminum
Standard: EN 61 238-1 * Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.
Dimensions: Dimensions:
Non-insulated cable terminals for crimping Bimetal non-insulated cable terminals for crimping K2
Shoe d1 D d2 L Catalogue Shoe d1 D d2 L l B Catalogue
type (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) number type (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) number
JM - 2.5 2.2 4.5 6 24 59240 DTL - 16 6 11 8 70 30 16 59224

JM - 4 3.0 4.8 6 24 59241 DTL - 25 7 12 8 75 34 18 59225
JM - 6 3.8 5.5 6 24 59035 DTL - 35 8.5 14 10 85 38 20.5 59226
JM - 6 3.8 5.5 8 24 59059 DTL - 50 9.8 16 10 90 40 23 59227
JМ - 10 4.8 6.8 6 25.5 59036 DTL - 70 11.5 18 12 102 48 26 59228
JM - 10 4.8 6.8 8 25.5 59037 DTL - 95 13.5 21 12 112 50 28 59229
JM - 16 5.5 7.5 6 30.5 59038 DTL - 120 15 23 14 120 53 30 59230
JM - 16 5.5 7.5 8 30.5 59039 DTL - 150 16.5 25 14 126 56 34 59231
JM - 16 5.5 7.5 10 30.5 59040 DTL - 185 18.5 27 16 133 58 37 59232
JM - 25 7 9 8 34 59041 DTL - 240 21 30 16 140 60 40 59233
JM - 25 7 9 10 34 59042
JM - 35 8.2 10.5 8 38 59043
JM - 35 8.2 10.5 10 38 59044
JM - 35 8.2 10.5 12 38 59045
JM - 50 9.8 12.5 8 45 59046
JM - 50 9.8 12.5 10 45 59047
JM - 50 9.8 12.5 12 45 59048
JM - 70 11.5 14.5 10 50 59049
JM - 70 11.5 14.5 12 50 59050
JM - 95 13.8 17.5 10 55.5 59051
JM - 95 13.8 17.5 12 55.5 59052
JM - 120 15.5 19.5 10 63 59053
JM - 120 15.5 19.5 12 63 59054
JM - 150 16.5 21 12 71 59055
JM - 185 18.8 23.5 12 78 59056
JM - 185 18.8 23.5 16 78 59057
JM - 240 21 26.5 16 92 59058
138
Insulated terminals
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Insulated butt connectors
They are cable butt terminal with cross section up to 6mm2 with polyvinylchloride insulation. They are used for
joining/extending multiple conductors with section up to 6mm. It increases the connection stability against vibrations and
decreases the possibility for short circuit. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing
of the terminal and conductor. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. They are
manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.
Technical data:
* Coating: polyvinylchloride
* Application: general for joining copper conductors
Colour red blue yellow
Length (mm) 16 25 16 25 20 25
Package
(pcs.) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Type number PVT 1.25 BV 1.25 PVT 2 BV 2 PVT 5.5 BV 5.5
Conductor
(mm2) 1 1 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5 4-6 4-6
Catalogue
59015 59001 59034 59002 59014 59003
number
Insulated cable terminals
They represent a cable terminal made of brass alloy with galvanic tin coating and insulated with polyvinylchloride. They
are used as non-insulated terminals, as the insulated part protects the cores from bending and breaking in the joining
point and at the same time it protects the staff from direct contact to the current leading elements. They are used for
connectors with section up to 6mm. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the
terminal and cable. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. They are manufactured
under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.
All insulated cable terminals are being offered in 100 pcs. packing
Technical data:
* Coating: polyvinylchloride
* Application: general for joining copper conductors
MDD - red MDD - red MDD - blue MDD - blue MDD - yellow
MALE
1.25 - 187 1.25 - 250 2 - 187 2 - 250 5.5 - 250
Catalogue
number 59012 59009 59013 59011 59010
K3 FEMALE
FDD - red FDD - red FDD - blue FDD - blue FDD - yellow
1.25 - 187 1.25 - 250 2 - 187 2 - 250 5.5 - 250
Shoe 187 250 187 250 250
width
Conductor
(mm2) 1 1 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5 4-6
Catalogue
number 59008 59006 59007 59004 59005
dark milky grey-

Colour white blue red black grey orange green green yellow black yellow
Type Е0508 Е7508 Е1008 Е1510 Е2512 Е4012 Е6018 Е10-18 Е16-18 Е25-16 Е35-25
Terminal
length 8 8 8 10 12 12 18 18 18 16 25
(mm)
Conductor
(mm2) 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10 16 25 35
Catalogue 59023 59024 59025 59026 59027 59028 59029 59030 59031 59032 59033
number
Colour red blue yellow
Type RVL 1.25-4 RVL 1.25-5 RVL 2-4 RVL 2-5 RVL 5.5-4 RV 5.5-5 RV 5.5-6
Package
(pcs.) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Size of the 4 5 4 5 4 5 6
opening (mm)
Conductor
(mm2) 1 1 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5 4-6 4-6 4-6
Catalogue 59021 59022 59018 59019 59020 59016 59017
number
139
Insulated terminals
www.elmarkgroup.eu
PTV - red PTV - red PTV - blue PTV - blue PTV - yellow
MALE
1.25 - 10 1.25 - 12 2 - 10 2 - 12 5.5 - 13
Shoe
width 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 2.9
Conductor
(mm2) 0.25-1.5 0.25-2.5 1.5-2.5 1.5-2.5 4-6
Catalogue
number 59101 59102 59103 59104 59105
PBDD - red PBDD - blue PBDD - yellow

MALE
1.25 - 250 2 - 250 5.5 - 250
Shoe 6.3 6.3 6.3
width
Conductor
(mm2) 0.25-1.5 1.5-2.5 4-6
Catalogue
number 59106 59107 59108
MPD - red MPD - blue MPD - yellow

MALE
1.25 - 156 2 - 195 5.5 - 195
Shoe 6.3 6.3 6.3
width
Conductor
(mm2) 0.25-1.5 1.5-2.5 4-6
Catalogue
number 59109 59110 59111
MDFN - red MDFN - blue MDFN - yellow

MALE
1.25 - 250 2 - 250 5 - 250
Shoe 4 4 5
width
Conductor
0.25-1.5 1.5-2.5 4-6
K3
(mm2)
Catalogue
number 59112 59113 59114
Length (mm) 18.1 20.1 25.5 27.3

Package
(pcs.) 100 100 100 100
Type number CHS3 CHS4 CHS5 CHS6

Conductor
(mm2) 0.25-1.5 1.5-2.5 4-6 8
Catalogue
59115 59116 59117 59118
number
140
Consumatives
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Cable glands PG type
They are designed to provide the IP code IP at conductors passing through the walls of the electrical distribution boxes.
They represent a plastic pipe supplied with the corresponding gaskets and nuts. All cable gland elements are made of
high quality plastic (PE) or rubber.
Technical data:
* Material: polyethylene (PE)
* Colour: gray
* IP code: IP 55
Standard: EN 60 423; 4858-81
Cable gland Overlapping Т B d D L1 L2 Catalogue

type field (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) number
PG-7 3.5-6.8 16.3 18 12 6.6 10 22 500070

PG-9 5-8 18.9 21.7 15.5 8.5 10 25 500090
PG-11 6-10 21.7 23.5 18.5 10.4 8.5 29 500110
PG-13.5 7-12 23.6 26.5 20 13 10 29 500135
PG-16 8-14 26.5 29.3 21.5 14 9 29 500160
PG-19 9-17 29 32 23 17 12 29 500190
PG-21 10-18 32.3 35.6 28 19 12 35 500210
PG-24 15-22 32.6 32.6 29.8 24 13 31 500240
PG-29 16-24 41.1 45.4 36 26 12.5 40 500290
PG-36 18-28 52 58 46 31.5 12.5 45 500360
PG-42 26-362 57.4 61.9 51 37.6 17.5 47 500420
PG-48 32-39 65.2 70.7 58 43 21 50 500480
Zero rails
They represent a brass rail with rectangular section with fabric made openings for the conductors and bolts for clamping
of the conductor. They are offered in types with insulated and non-insulated rail. They are used in the electrical
distribution boxes for zeroing and earthing.
Technical data:
* Material: brass for the current leading elements
* Insulation material: plastic
* Colour: gray/blue
K4
Zero rails
Rail Lenght Height Widht Number of Catalogue
L (mm) H (mm) W (mm) Ø D (mm) Bolt number
type terminals
BRASS 1000 7.8 6 5 М4 14002
ZERO 250 5 М4 16 14012

insulated
Zero terminals
SP 031 Rail L A B C M Catalogue
ØD
type number
SP 029-4 82.9.4 21.5 12 70.5 6.5 5x10 14204

SP 029-6 100.9 21.5 12 88.5 6.5 5x10 14206
SP 029-8 118.9 21.5 12 106.5 6.5 5x10 14208
SP 029-10 136.9 21.5 12 124.5 6.5 5x10 14210
SP 029-12 182.4 21.5 12 170 6.5 5x10 14212
SP 031-4 59.5 31.5 12.4 48.5 6.5 5x10 14304
SP 031-6 76.5 31.5 12.4 65.5 6.5 5x10 14306
SP 029 SP 031-8 93 31.5 12.4 82 6.5 5x10 14308
SP 031-10 111 31.5 12.4 100 6.5 5x10 14310
SP 031-12 128 31.5 12.4 117 6.5 5x10 14312
141
Consumatives
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Insulating PVC tape with dimensions 0.15mm / 19mm / 20y
Colour black white red blue yellow/green
Package
(pcs.) 10 10 10 10 10
Catalogue
51001 51005 51002 51006 51004
number
Clips for cable fixing
Type CHR-4 CHR-5 CHR-6 CHR-7 CHR-8 CHR-9 CHR-10 CHR-12 CHR-14 CHR-16
Ф 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16
Catalogue
number 500004 500005 500006 500007 500008 500009 500010 500012 500014 500016
Cable ties
Length
100 150 160 200 250 280 300 300 370 380 450 500
(mm)
Width
(mm)
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4.8 3.5 4.8 4.8 7.9
Catalogue number
white 500100 500152 500162 500202 500253 500283 500303 500304 500373 500384 500454 500507
Catalogue number
black - 500151 500161 - 500251 500281 500301 - - - - 500501 K4
142
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Consumatives
Cable tags – sets

TYPE Section (mm) Number in a roller Catalogue number TYPE Section (mm) Number in a roller Catalogue number
EC-0-0 1.5 - 3.2 1000 318000 EC-0-a 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800a
EC-0-1 1.5 - 3.2 1000 318001 EC-0-b 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800b
EC-0-2 1.5 - 3.2 1000 318002 EC-0-R 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800R
EC-0-3 1.5 - 3.2 1000 318003 EC-0-S 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800S
EC-0-4 1.5 - 3.2 1000 318004 EC-0-T 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800T
EC-0-5 1.5 - 3.2 1000 318005 EC-0-N 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800N
EC-0-6 1.5 - 3.2 1000 318006 EC-0-P 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800P
EC-0-7 1.5 - 3.2 1000 318007 EC-0-Е 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800E
EC-0-8 1.5 - 3.2 1000 318008 EC-0-А 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800A
EC-0-9 1.5 - 3.2 1000 318009 EC-0-B 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800B
EC-0-C 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800C
EC-0-Q 1.5 - 3.2 1000 31800Q
EC-1-0 2.6 - 4.2 1000 318010 EC-1-a 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801a
EC-1-1 2.6 - 4.2 1000 318011 EC-1-b 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801b
EC-1-2 2.6 - 4.2 1000 318012 EC-1-R 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801R
EC-1-3 2.6 - 4.2 1000 318013 EC-1-S 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801S
EC-1-4 2.6 - 4.2 1000 318014 EC-1-T 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801T
EC-1-5 2.6 - 4.2 1000 318015 EC-1-N 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801N
EC-1-6 2.6 - 4.2 1000 318016 EC-1-P 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801P
EC-1-7 2.6 - 4.2 1000 318017 EC-1-Е 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801E
EC-1-8 2.6 - 4.2 1000 318018 EC-1-А 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801A
EC-1-9 2.6 - 4.2 1000 318019 EC-1-B 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801B
EC-1-C 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801C
EC-1-Q 2.6 - 4.2 1000 31801Q
EC-2-0 3.6 - 5.2 500 318020 EC-2-a 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802a
EC-2-1 3.6 - 5.2 500 318021 EC-2-b 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802b
EC-2-2 3.6 - 5.2 500 318022 EC-2-R 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802R
EC-2-3 3.6 - 5.2 500 318023 EC-2-S 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802S
EC-2-4 3.6 - 5.2 500 318024 EC-2-T 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802T
EC-2-5 3.6 - 5.2 500 318025 EC-2-N 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802N
EC-2-6 3.6 - 5.2 500 318026 EC-2-P 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802P
EC-2-7 3.6 - 5.2 500 318027 EC-2-Е 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802E
EC-2-8 3.6 - 5.2 500 318028 EC-2-А 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802A
EC-2-9 3.6 - 5.2 500 318029 EC-2-B 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802B
EC-2-C 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802C
EC-2-Q 3.6 - 5.2 500 31802Q
K5
EC-3-0 5 - 7.2 250 318030 EC-3-a 5 - 7.2 250 31803a
EC-3-1 5 - 7.2 250 318031 EC-3-b 5 - 7.2 250 31803b
EC-3-2 5 - 7.2 250 318032 EC-3-R 5 - 7.2 250 31803R
EC-3-3 5 - 7.2 250 318033 EC-3-S 5 - 7.2 250 31803S
EC-3-4 5 - 7.2 250 318034 EC-3-T 5 - 7.2 250 31803T
EC-3-5 5 - 7.2 250 318035 EC-3-N 5 - 7.2 250 31803N
EC-3-6 5 - 7.2 250 318036 EC-3-P 5 - 7.2 250 31803P
EC-3-7 5 - 7.2 250 318037 EC-3-Е 5 - 7.2 250 31803E
EC-3-8 5 - 7.2 250 318038 EC-3-А 5 - 7.2 250 31803A
EC-3-9 5 - 7.2 250 318039 EC-3-B 5 - 7.2 250 31803B
EC-3-C 5 - 7.2 250 31803C
EC-3-Q 5 - 7.2 250 31803Q
143
Terminal blocks www.elmarkgroup.eu
Fixed terminal blocks
Series fixed terminal blocks with universal application in

electrical distribution boxes. For DIN-rail mounting.
Variety of sizes for optimum using of the space in the
distribution boxes through selection of appropriate H
terminals for the corresponding conductors. Made of
non-flammable insulating polymeric material.
W
Standard: IEC - 60947-7-1 L
Section of the Size of the In (А) Un (V) Colour Type number Catalogue
conductor (mm2) terminal (mm) number
single-core multiple-core L H W
0.2-4 0.2-2.5 42.5 47 5.2 32 800 grey LTU2UK 3N 31033
red LTU2UK 3N 31032
black LTU2UK 3N 31031
blue LTU2UK 3N 31035
"...6" 8mm
0.2-6 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 41 800 grey LTU2UK 5N 31053
red LTU2UK 5N 31052
"...6" 8mm
0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 57 800 grey LTU2UK 6N 31063
red LTU2UK 6N 31062
blue LTU2UK 6N 31065 K5
"...8" 10mm
0.5-16 0.5-10 42.5 47 10.2 76 800 grey LTU2UK 10N 31103
red LTU2UK 10N 31102
"...10" 12mm
2.5-25 4-16 42.5 47 12.2 101 800 grey LTU2UIK 16 31163
10-35 10-35 55 62 15.2 125 800 grey LTU2UIK 35 31353
"...10" 12mm "...10" 16mm

144
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Terminal blocks
LTU2 UK JD series
Series double-sided insulated fixed terminal blocks designed to connect earthing
conductors. Two-colour insulation (yellow and green). Made of non-flammable
insulating polymeric material.
Type Section of the Size of the In (А) Un (V) Colour Catalogue

number conductor (mm2) terminal (mm) number
5JD 0.2-4 0.2-4 42.5 47 6.2 34 800 yellow-green 31054
6JD 0.2-10 0.2-6 42.5 47 8.2 37 800 yellow-green 31064
10JD 0.5-10 0.5-6 42.5 47 8.2 61 800 yellow-green 31104
Standard: IEC - 60947-7-1
16JD 2.5-25 2.5-16 42.5 47 12.2 108 800 yellow-green 31164
35JD 2.5-35 2.5-35 42.5 47 15 135 800 yellow-green 31354
"...10" 16mm
Accessories for fixed terminal blocks – marking tags ZB type

Accessories for marking and separation of different electrical circuits, voltage and fixing of
elements for DIN-rail mounting.
Type Number of tags Colour Size Catalogue

number in a strip (mm) number
ZB6 20 white 6 31906

ZB8 10 white 8 31908
End cover
Type number Colour Thickness Catalogue
(mm) number
EC grey 1.5 31901
K5
Fixing terminal E/UK type

Type number Colour Thickness Catalogue
(mm) number
Е/UK grey 5 31902
Terminal blocks TBH type

Type number Number of tags In (А) Un (V) Colour Section of the Catalogue
in a strip conductor (mm2) number
TBH 3A 10 3 660 semi-transparent up to 1.5 31003

TBH 6A 10 6 660 semi-transparent up to 4 31006
TBH 10A 10 10 660 semi-transparent up to 6 31010
TBH 15A 10 15 660 white up to 6 31015
TBH 20A 10 20 660 white up to 10 31020
145
Thermal shrinkable tubes
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Thermal shrinkable tubes ZDG type
The thin wall thermal shrinkable tubes are used for cable connections insulation, at conductors repair to protect the cable
head from corrosion, for protection of the cable insulation from water and moisture, for restoring the cable insulation
integrity, etc. It is a plastic thin wall pipe which at temperature higher than 120°C shrinks its initial diameter to a certain
degree. The material has high temperature and UV rays wear resistance. The material represents the so called
permanently netted plastic. This material is obtained as the plastic billet is processed with the help of high energy electron
rays so that inner molecular bonds between adjacent molecules are formed. After that the pipe is heated to the boiling
point, the pipe inflates, so do the inner molecular bonds. Then the pipe is sharply refrigerated and the molecules stay in
the condition of inflated bonds for indefinite long time. Heating the pipe repeatedly (after being mounted to the given
cable) the crystals melt again but due to the net structure, they resume the initial pipe diameter and take the form of the
cable, pressing it and not allowing the moisture to get under the pipe.
Standard: EN 60 684
Technical data:
* Material: threefold netted polyene
* Colours: blue, black, red, yellow, yellow-green, green, white
* Contraction degree: min 2 : 1
* Ambient temperature: -40 to + 100°C
* Contraction temperature: min 120°C
* Flame wear resistance: burns faintly
* It does not liberate harmful substances
* Insulation resistance: 1х 10 1 2 Ω/cm
* Insulating voltage 1000 V
D1 D2 S Quantity Catalogue number *

(mm) (mm) (mm) (m) blue, red, black, green, yellow, yellow-green
1 0.5 0.04 200 301001x

1.5 0.75 0.04 200 301115x
2 1.0 0.05 200 301002x
3 1.5 0.05 200 301003x
4 2.0 0.08 100 301004x
5 2.5 0.08 100 301005x
6 3.0 0.08 100 301006x
7 3.5 0.08 100 301007x
8 4.0 0.08 100 301008x K6
9 4.5 0.08 100 301009x
10 5.0 0.08 100 301010x
11 5.5 0.08 100 301011x
12 6.0 0.08 100 301012x
13 6.5 0.08 100 301013x
14 7.0 0.08 100 301014x
15 7.5 0.08 100 301015x
16 8.0 0.08 100 301016x
18 9.0 0.08 50 301018x
20 10 0.08 50 301020x
22 11 0.08 50 301022x
25 12.5 0.08 25 301025x
28 14 0.08 25 301028x
30 15 0.08 25 301030x
35 16.5 0.08 25 301035x
40 20 0.08 25 301040x
50 25 0.08 25 301050x
60 30 0.08 25 301060x
70 35 0.08 25 301070x
80 40 0.08 25 301080x
90 45 0.08 25 301090x
100 50 0.08 25 301100x
120 60 0.08 25 301120x
150 75 0.08 25 301150x
Note: * At orders after the catalogue number of the corresponding diameter a letter showing the colour must be added: B – blue; R – red; K -
black; G - green; Y – yellow; V – yellow-green
Electrical switches and sockets
146
"RHYME”
10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A
Scheme White Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme Gold Package Scheme Coffee Package Scheme Grey Package Scheme Graphite Package
metallic (pcs) metallic (pcs) metallic (pcs) metallic (pcs) metallic (pcs) metallic (pcs)
Sch.1 11011 10 Sch.1 11012 10 Sch.1 11013 10 Sch.1 11016 10 Sch.1 11014 10 Sch.1 11015 10
Sch.7 Sch.7 Sch.7 Sch.7 Sch.7 Sch.7
10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A
400W 400W 400W 400W 400W 400W
L1 Scheme White
metallic
Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme
(pcs) metallic (pcs)
Gold
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Coffee
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Grey
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Graphite
metallic
Package
(pcs)
dimmer 11191 10 dimmer 11192 10 dimmer 11193 10 dimmer 11196 10 dimmer 11194 10 dimmer 11195 10
10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A
door bell 11181 10 door bell 11182 10 door bell 11183 10 door bell 11186 10 door bell 11184 10 door bell 11185 10
door bell 11181В 10 10 door bell 11184В
with sign with sign
push 11181C 10 push 11182C 10 push 11183C 10 push 11186C 10 push 11184C 10 push 11185C 10
button button button button button button
147
"RHYME” www.elmarkgroup.eu
16A 16A 16A 16A 16A 16A
L3 German
metallic (pcs)
German
metallic (pcs)
German
metallic (pcs)
German
metallic (pcs)
German
metallic (pcs)
German
metallic (pcs)
type 11211 10 type 11212 10 type 11213 10 type 11216 10 type 11214 10 type 11215 10
socket socket socket socket socket socket
Phone 11261 10 Phone 11262 10 Phone 11263 10 Phone 11266 10 Phone 11264 10 Phone 11265 10
Computer 11281 10 Computer 11282 10 Computer 11283 10 Computer 11286 10 Computer 11284 10 Computer 11285 10
TV 11251 10 TV 11252 10 TV 11253 10 TV 11256 10 TV 11254 10 TV 11255 10
Scheme White Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme

(pcs) metallic (pcs)
Gold Package Scheme
(pcs)
Coffee
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Grey
metallic
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Graphite
metallic
Package
(pcs)
L1
metallic metallic
Insert key Insert key Insert key Insert key Insert key Insert key
power 11331 10 power 11332 10 power 11333 10 power 11336 10 power 11334 10 power 11335 10
switch switch switch switch switch switch
Panel White Package Panel Champagne Package Panel Gold Package Panel Coffee Package Panel Grey Package Panel Graphite Package
Double 11551 10 Double 11552 10 Double 11553 10 Double 11556 10 Double 11554 10 Double 11555 10
Triple 11661 10 Triple 11662 10 Triple 11663 10 Triple 11666 10 Triple 11664 10 Triple 11665 10
148
Panels “Splendor”
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Colour WHITE
Type single single with cover double triple
Catalogue № 06301 0629 06311 06321
Package(pcs) 40 20 40 40
Colour CHROME
Type single double triple
Catalogue № 063010 063110 063210
Package(pcs) 40 40 40
Colour SILVER GRAY

Catalogue № 06302 06312 06322
Colour YELLOW
Catalogue № 06304 06314 06324
Colour PEAR-TREE
Catalogue № 06305 06315 06325
Colour GOLDEN
Catalogue № 063011 063111 063211
Colour BORDO
Catalogue № 06307 06317 06327
Colour CHERRY-TREE
Catalogue № 06306 06316 06326
L2
Colour BLACK
Type single single with cover double triple
Catalogue № 06303 1629 06313 06323
Colour ORANGE
Catalogue № 063012 063112 063212
Colour LIGHT BLUE

Catalogue № 06308 06318 06328
Colour DARK BLUE

Catalogue № 06309 06319 06329
149
Functional part “SPLENDOR”
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Type Rated current Colour Catalogue Package
In (A) number (pcs)
one button 10 white 0601 10

one way switch dark gray 1601
one button two white 0602
way switch 10 10
dark gray 1602
white 0603
cross switch 10 10
dark gray 1603

In (A) number (pcs)
two buttons white 0610

one way switch 10 10
dark gray 1610
two buttons one way white 0612 / 0611
switch with light / two 10 10
buttons two way switch dark gray 1612 / 1611

In (A) number (pcs)
German type socket white 0616

16 dark gray 1616 10

In (A) number (pcs)
one button one white 0606

way switch with light 10 10
dark gray 1606
way switch with light 10 10
dark gray 1607

In (A) number (pcs)
white 0605 10
Push light button 10
dark gray 1605
white 0609
Door bell switch 10 10
dark gray 1609
Type Power Colour Catalogue Package

(W) number (pcs)
Dimmer switch white 0618

350 10
dark gray 1618
Fan speed switch white 0619
500 10
dark gray 1619
L2
Type Colour Catalogue Package
number (pcs)
white 0621
ТV RG 11 10
dark gray 1621

number (pcs)
Phone socket white 0623 10

dark gray 1623
white 06232
Phone socket double 10
dark gray 16232
white 0624
Computer socket RG 45 10
dark gray 1624

In (A) number (pcs)
Insert key white 0633

power switch 10 10
dark gray 1633
150
www.elmarkgroup.eu
"BASIC"
10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A
Scheme White Package Scheme Beige Package Scheme Silver Package Scheme Graphite Package Scheme Blue Package Scheme Tree Package
(pcs) (crème) (pcs) gray (pcs) dark gray (pcs) (pcs) (Pear) (pcs)
TG101 TG101 TG101 TG101 TG101 TG101
TG102 TG102 TG102 TG102 TG102 TG102
TG115 TG115 TG115 TG115 TG115 TG115
Sch.1light 38700 10 Sch.1light 38701 10 Sch.1light 38702 10 Sch.1light 38703 10 Sch.1light 38704 10 Sch.1light 38705 10
TG114 TG114 TG114 TG114 TG114 TG114
10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A
TG103 TG103 TG103 TG103 TG103 TG103
400W 400W 400W 400W 400W 400W
L3 Scheme White Package Scheme

(pcs)
Beige
(crème)
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Silver
gray
Package Scheme Graphite
(pcs) dark gray
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Blue Package Scheme
(pcs)
Tree
(Pear)
Package
(pcs)
dimmer 38800 10 dimmer 38801 10 dimmer 38802 10 dimmer 38803 10 dimmer 38804 10 dimmer 38805 10
TG111 TG111 TG111 TG111 TG111 TG111
10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A
push button push button push button push button push button push button
TG112A 38100 10 TG112A 38101 10 TG112A 38102 10 TG112A 38103 10 TG112A 38104 10 TG112A 38105 10
door bell door bell door bell door bell door bell door bell
TG112 38120 10 TG112 38121 10 TG112 38122 10 TG112 38123 10 TG112 38124 10 TG112 38125 10
151
"BASIC" www.elmarkgroup.eu
16A 16A 16A 16A 16A 16A
Ger.type Ger.type Ger.type Ger.type Ger.type Ger.type
38200 10 38201 10 38202 10 38203 10 38204 10 38205 10
TZ107 TZ107 TZ107 TZ107 TZ107 TZ107
Ger.type Ger.type Ger.type Ger.type Ger.type Ger.type
TZ107C
38250 10 TZ107C
38251 10 TZ107C
38252 10 TZ107C
38253 10 TZ107C
38254 10 TZ107C
38255 10
with cover with cover with cover with cover with cover with cover
tel. 38350 10 tel. 38351 10 tel. 38352 10 tel. 38353 10 tel. 38354 10 tel. 38355 10
TZ106 TZ106 TZ106 TZ106 TZ106 TZ106
comp. 38300 10 comp. 38301 10 comp. 38302 10 comp. 38303 10 comp. 38304 10 comp. 38305 10
TZ112 TZ112 TZ112 TZ112 TZ112 TZ112
Scheme White Package Scheme

(pcs)
Beige
(crème)
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Silver
gray
Package Scheme Graphite
(pcs) dark gray
Package Scheme
(pcs)
Blue Package Scheme
(pcs)
Tree
(Pear)
Package
(pcs)
L3
TV 38360 10 TV 38361 10 TV 38362 10 TV 38363 10 TV 38364 10 TV 38365 10
TZ111 TZ111 TZ111 TZ111 TZ111 TZ111
Panel White Package Panel Beige Package Panel Silver Package Panel Graphite Package Panel Blue Package Panel Tree Package
Double 38900 10 Double 38901 10 Double 38902 10 Double 38903 10 Double 38904 10 Double 38905 10
Triple 38910 10 Triple 38911 10 Triple 38912 10 Triple 38913 10 Triple 38914 10 Triple 38915 10
152
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Panels and frames "LIFE STYLE"
PANELS Colour WHITE
Type single double triple quadruple sixfold
Catalogue № 34601 34613 34625 34637 34660
Package(pcs) 40 40 40 35 35
Colour CHROME
Type single double triple quadruple
Catalogue № 34609 34621 34633 34645
Colour SILVER GRAY

Catalogue № 34610 34622 34634 34646 34662 Frame double triple quadruple sixfold
Package(pcs) 40 40 40 35 35 Catalogue № 24262 24201 24202 24206F
Package (pcs) 10 10 10 10
Colour YELLOW
Type single double triple quadruple * Single switch or socket use triple frame
Catalogue № 34602 34614 34626 34638
Colour PEAR-TREE
Catalogue № 34611 34623 34635 34647
Colour GOLDEN
Type single double triple quadruplle
Catalogue № 34608 34620 34632 34644
Colour BORDO
Type single double triple quadruple Console box for bricks and concrete Console box for hollow-wall
Catalogue № 34606 34618 34630 34642 Console triple quadruple sixfold triple quadruple sixfold
Package(pcs) 40 40 40 35 Catalogue № 24203 71304 68206 24205 24206

Package (pcs) 10 10 10 10 10
Colour CHERRY-TREE
Type single double triple quadruple * Single, double or triple swich or socket use triple console
Catalogue № 34162 34624 34636 34648
L4
Colour DARK GRAY
Catalogue № 34607 34619 34631 34643 34661
Package(pcs) 40 40 40 35 35
Colour GREEN
Catalogue № 34603 34615 34627 34639
Colour LIGHT BLUE

Catalogue № Surface mounting box Watertight box
34605 34617 34629 34641
Box double triple quadruple triple quadruple sixfold
Catalogue № 2702 2703 22451А 22461А
Colour DARK BLUE Package (pcs) 10 10 10 10
Catalogue № 34604 34616 34628 34640
153
Functional part “LIFE STYLE”
www.elmarkgroup.eu
In (A) number (pcs)
one button white 20501
one way switch 16 4
dark gray 21501
white 20579
cross switch 16 4
dark gray 21579

In (A) number (pcs)
way switch 16 4
dark gray 21506
way switch with light 16 dark gray 21507 4

In (A) number (pcs)
door bell switch white 20510A
with light 10 4
dark gray 21510A
push button white 20510B
with light 10 4
dark gray 21510B

In (A) number (pcs)
white 20521
curtain switch 10 4
dark gray 21521

(W) number (pcs)
dimmer switch white 20803

500 8
dark gray 21803
fan speed switch white 20803A
500 8
dark gray 21803A

(VA) number (pcs)
white 20616
bell 230V 8 8
dark gray 21616

In (A) number (pcs)
German type white 20265
16 4
socket dark gray 21265

In (A) number (pcs)
Italian standard
L4
white 20203
multi socket 16 4
dark gray 21203

number (pcs)
white 20228
TV antenna socket RG 11 4
dark gray 21228

number (pcs)
white 20251
phone socket 4
dark gray 21251
computer socket white 20266
RG 45 4
dark gray 21266

In (A) number (pcs)
decorative switch white 20056

10
dark gray 21056
154
Multiplugs and cable reels
www.elmarkgroup.eu
MAK-2A with thermal protection

Model Package Cable Cable Catalogue
(pcs) specification length number
H05VV-F 10 3 x 1.5mm2 10m 47911
A1
MAK-3 with thermal protection

H05VV-F 4 3 x 1.5mm2 20m 47921

2
H05VV-F 4 3 x 1.5mm 25m 47925
MAK-4 with thermal protection

H05VV-F 2 3 x 1.5mm2 25m 47927

2
H05VV-F 2 3 x 1.5mm 40m 47940
H05VV-F 2 3 x 1.5mm2 50m 47950
K7 DG - D03B / DG - D04B
Model Cable Cable Catalogue
specification length number
H05VV-F (DG-D03B)
H05VV-F (DG-D03B) 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 47031
H05VV-F (DG-D03B) 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 47080
H05VV-F (DG-D04B) 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 47081
H05VV-F (DG-D04B) 3 x 1.0mm2 1.5m 47041
H05VV-F (DG-D04B) 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 47082
Max.3500W,16/250~ 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 47083
DG - D05B / DG - D06B
Model Cable Cable Catalogue
specification length number
H05VV-F (DG-D05B) 3 x 1.5mm2 1.5m 47051

H05VV-F (DG-D05B) 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 47053
H05VV-F (DG-D05B) 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 47055
H05VV-F (DG-D06B) 3 x 1.5mm2 1.5m 47061
H05VV-F (DG-D06B) 3 x 1.5mm2 3.0m 47063
H05VV-F (DG-D06B) 3 x 1.5mm2 5.0m 47065
Max.3500W,16/250~
Notes
155
www.elmarkgroup.eu
ELMARK’s participation in technical exhibitions
156
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Hannover Messe 2008, Germany

ELMARK sample boards in business centers
157
www.elmarkgroup.eu
Board 1 Board 2
Board 3 Board switches

Service and maintenance
158
www.elmarkgroup.eu
ELMARK HOLDING SC offers wide range of services to answer the client’s requirements
completely and thoroughly.
In order to improve the service quality ELMARK HOLDING has opened:
E-mail: support@elmarkholding.eu; tel. +359 52 575 500; fax +359 52 575 501
to receive claims, advice, questions and orders for services.
* ELMARK HOLDING SC provides guarantee and post-guarantee maintenance to all

products.
* Repair or replacement of damaged devices in guarantee or post-guarantee period.
* Each letter could be sent in the language preferred by the client.
* The guarantee of the products is valid at adherence to the specifications for mounting
and exploitation.
ELMARK HOLDING SC has started engineering services as well.

* Making of boards at client’s documentation projects.
* Appurtenances mounting in industrial projects.
* Recommendation for modernization and reconstruction of outdated devices.
* Choice of suitable current leakage protection in order to improve the safety of the staff.
* Defining the power supply voltage quality and the consumed capacity.
* Harmonic analysis of the power supply voltage and studying the possibilities for failure
lessening. Calculating smoothing filters.
* Capacity factor measuring and calculating the necessary capacitor batteries. Cutting
down the energy losses and improving the quality of the supplied electrical energy.
To connect the engineering department you can refer to:

e-mail: engineering@elmarkholding.eu
or phone +359 89 666 88 01, fax +359 58 66 25 25
ELMARK HOLDING SC GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR BULGARIA
BULGARIA, VARNA ELMARK GROUP - BULGARIA LTD

ZPZ, 10 Perla Str. BULGARIA, VARNA
Tel. +359 52 57 55 00 ZPZ, 10 Perla Str.
Fax +359 52 57 55 01 Tel. +359 52 57 55 55
E-mail: office@elmarkholding.eu Fax +359 52 57 55 80
E-mail: officevarna@elmarkgroup.eu
ELMARK FACTORY IN EUROPE BULGARIA, SOFIA

160 Geo Milev Blvd.
ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC Tel./Fax +359 2 971 15 60 / 61
BULGARIA, DOBRICH E-mail: officesofia@elmarkgroup.eu
2 Dobrudja Blvd.
Tel./Fax +359 58 66 25 25 BULGARIA, PLOVDIV
E-mail: elmarkfactory@elmarkholding.eu 180 Brezovsko Shose, warehouse No. 25
Tel./Fax +359 32 968 210
E-mail: officeplovdiv@elmarkgroup.eu
www.elmarkgroup.eu
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR ROMANIA GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR GREECE
ELMARK GRUP SRL ANASTASIADI S.A.
ROMANIA, BUCHAREST GREECE, THESSALONIKI
8 Bucuresti Urziceni Str. 4, G. Drossini Str., Kordelio
Tel. +40 21 351 54 81 / 82 Tel. +30 2310 700250
Fax +40 21 351 54 83 Fax +30 2310 707577
E-mail: officebucharest@elmarkgroup.eu E-mail: central@anastasiadi.gr
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR SERBIA GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR CYPRUS
ELMARK GRUP DOO HLEKTRAPOTHIKI L.T.D.
SERBIA, KRAGUJEVAC CYPRUS, PAFOS
4 Drage Todorovich Str. 3, Kalamatas Str.
Tel. +381 34 311 777 Tel. +357 26 937 726
Fax +381 34 311 778
E-mail: officekragujevac@elmarkgroup.eu GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA
SERBIA, BELGRADE STANEX DOO

Zemun - Altina BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA, ZENICA
54 Ugrinovachki put Str. 17 KRALJA TVRTKA I Str.
Mobile +381 63 114 77 82 Tel. +387 32 444 040 / 050 / 060
Tel./Fax +381 11 316 39 50 E-mail: stanex@bih.net.ba
E-mail: officebelgrade@elmarkgroup.eu
ELIM DOO
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR CROATIA BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA, LAKTAŠI
Shushniaari Str.
STIMO DOO Tel. +387 51 586 000
CROATIA, BJELOVAR Fax +387 51 586 060
8 Hrvatskog proljeca Str. E-mail: elimdoo@blic.net
Tel./Fax +385 43 212 211
Tel./Fax +385 43 225 114 GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR MONTENEGRO
E-mail: stimo@stimo.hr
TRGOTEHNA DOO
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR HUNGARY MONTENEGRO, NIKSHICH
10 Zarka Zrenjanina Str.
ELEKTRO PROFI COMMERCIAL LTD. Tel./Fax +381 83 246 056
HUNGARY, BUDAPEST E-mail: trgotehna@cg.yu
3 Albertirsai Str.
Tel. +36 1 460 61 40 GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR MACEDONIA
Fax +36 1 460 61 41
E-mail: kereskedelem@elektroprofi.hu PIT KOM DOOEL
MACEDONIA, NEGOTINO
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR JORDAN 120 Dame Gruev Str.
Tel. +389 43 370 287
SOFIA IMPORT&EXPORT EST. Fax +389 43 370 282
JORDAN, AMMAN E-mail: pitcom@mt.net.mk
SHAFA BARDAN - ASP UNIVERSITY CIRCLE
PRINCE TATAL BIN MOHAMMAD STR. GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR IRAN
Tel. +962 7 77 749649
Fax +962 6 53 38589 ARMAN SORENA CO
E-mail: waleed_qudah@yahoo.com IRAN, TEHRAN
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR SRI LANKA First fl.-No15-4th Alley-Bokharest St.Dr.Beheshti Ave.
Tel. +98 21 88 73 31 91
ATTOTECH SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (PVT) LTD.
SRI LANKA, BALLUMMAHARA, GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR SOUTH AFRICA
Mudungoda, No: 72, Kandy Road
Tel. +943 34 674 803 VIKELA SYSTEMS (PTY) LTD.
Fax +943 34 674 802 Tel. +27 11 452 74 56
E-mail: general.inquiries@attotech.lk Fax +27 11 452 85 31
E-mail: info@vikelasystems.co.za
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR ISRAEL
GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR FRANCE
TAMHASH LTD
ISRAEL, RISHON LE ZION BEAUVILLIER J.PIERRE
21 Moshe Sharet St., P.O.B 5038 75151 FRANCE, St Germain du Teil
Tel. +972 3 9611288 Tel. +334 663 23 782
Fax +972 3 9616270 / 5747 Fax +334 663 23 458
E-mail: office@tamhash.co.il

Elmark 2008 EN

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Elmark 2008 EN

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ELMARK has been a registered trademark for Europe since the year of 2000 and is part of

CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION

DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS

Е13 Devices for temperature measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL

HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES

INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS

PLASTIC BOXES AND METAL CABINETS FOR DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

CONSUMATIVES AND CABLE TERMINALS

THERMAL SHRINKABLE TUBES

Notified by the European certificate organization NANDO – Brussels

MAXIMUM CURRENT RELEASE

AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory)

UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (accessory)

SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)

Circuit breakers are automatically-operated electrical switches, designed to protect electrical

Type designation Functions:

* Power supply (conducting)

62N / 2А 2 6 1.0 41202 41602 6 / 120

63N/2A 2 6 1.0 41302 41702 4 / 80

C60 curve B C60 curve C

1. Thermal release 1. Thermal release

Type designation: Functions:

1P 80 10 41180 41180D 9 / 180

2P 80 10 41280 41281 6 / 120

0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 i/in 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 i/in

Type designation: Functions:

C41N / 6A 6 4.5 1.0 41451 12 / 240

C43N / 6A 6 4.5 1.0 41541 4 / 80

C45 Curve B C45 Curve C

DP1N / 6 6 4.5 1.0 41006 12 / 240

Type designation Functions:

61DC / 1A 6 1 1.0 41164 12 / 240

62DC / 2A 6 2 1.0 41176 6 / 120

Combined voltage circuit-breaker МN2

ELMARK MN2 230V 41909 8 / 160

ELMARK MX 230V 41902 8 / 160

Isolated mounting terminal for circuit breakers

Type Section of the conductor Rated current Catalogue Package / Box

TB 25 2.5 до 35 63 31025 20 / 500

Type Rated Circuit breaker Catalogue Box / Carton

ELMARK OF 230V C40, C60 41901 12 / 240

1P 63 1 55 63А 90А 14163 10 / 100

Mounting (DIN) rail

Length Package / Box

Catalogue 14001 20 / 100

Standard EN 60947-3 и Functions:

ISS2-125 140 135 125 27 73 120 120 65 20 25 3.5 25

Maximum Tightening Catalogue

ISS2-125in 125 1250 6.5 41951 1 / 12

ЕQ2M-160 270 135 212 104 150 120 120 95 20 25 3.5 25

ЕQ2M-160 160 1250 6.5 44641 1/4

COVER TERMINAL PLASTIC PLATE

TERMINALS CONTACTS WITH BIMETAL PLATES

NON-FLAMABLE BASE THERMAL SYSTEM WITH MOVABLE CONTACTS

STATIC CONTACTS UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE - UVR (accessory)

PART FROM THE COVER 13 REMOTE CONTROL – electrical (accessory)

SCREWS FOR TERMINALS 14 AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory)

ARC CHAMBERS 15 SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)

ELEMENT FOR ADJUSTMENT 16 REMOTE CONTROL – manual (accessory)

Standard EN 60947-1 Functions:

Type Overall dimensions (mm) Installation dimensions (mm)